Home

4 - Carlson Software

1. Adjusted Point Comparison Original Adjusted Point Northing Easting Northing Easting Bearing 5013 775 5711 176 5013 772 5711 189 S 77 10 19 4560 707 5776 453 4560 702 5776 474 gt 77 10 19 4372 474 5705 140 4372 469 5705 165 S 77 10 19 E 4355 386 5208 439 4355 378 2208 472 77 10 19 4578 200 5231 228 4578 192 5231 266 M 71 10 19 4612 911 4999 942 4612 901 4999 984 A 77 10 19 3000 011 4999 951 2000 000 5000 000 s 5 77 10 19 Max adjustment 0 051 Starting Point 1 N 5000 000 E 5000 000 2 100 000 BackSight Point 21 N 5100 000 E 4900 000 2 100 0000 Point Horizontal Zenith Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR133 5326 90 0355 711 322 53 320 6 000 5013 772 5711 189 IPF Disturbed 113 AR262 5435 89 4728 457 753 5 430 6 000 4560 702 5776 474 X on Rock 100 AR200 5649 90 0000 155 441 5 430 6 000 4409 092 5742 176 ET Processing Methods No Adjust No Adjust means that no angle balance or traverse adjustment will be applied Options are specified in the Process Options dialog After picking OK for the process options dialog a Traverse Points dialog appears for entering the starting and ending point numbers Traverse Points starting Point Number mbar Cancel The program reads the raw file to set the defaults for these point numbers which are used to calculate the clo
2. 10 BackPt OccupyPt Point 11 21 1 12 1 2 13 2 3 14 2 3 15 2 3 16 3 4 Import Export Tab This tab provides controls to Export files and manage Reports Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 104 AS B BackPt 21 OccupyPt 1 Point 2 S 2 3 HorzAngle AR133 53 AR262 54 44 ZenithAng S9 405f 8973241 Northing 5013759 4560 688 Easting 5711 176 5776 433 Elev 103 262 106 329 Example of Mirror Output Option HorzAngle fenithAng 2 AR133 53 30 89 40 57 3 AR262 54 44 89 32 41 100 AR200 56 49 90 00 00 105 AR282 17753 90 17729 4 AR208 56 58 89 18 05 101 AR220 44 33 68 54 32 Without Mirror Output Northing Easting 2013 759 4560 666 4409 08 4571 365 4312 46 4229 325 2711 176 I 16 433 9 42 126 29627 546 9705 108 9441 53 Elev 103 262 106 329 105 759 105 108 184 113 296 Report MS Excel Impor Export Export This option contains various output options for the process report Options to output to the following formats are available XML Format xml Text or CSV file txt csv MS Excel database xls MS Access database mdb ODBC Data sources Misc database formats Data Destination Selection Selecta type of data destination C Text or CSV file bd csv 2MS Excel database xls OMS Access database mdb
3. Select Next to continue the Setup process Chapter 1 Product Overview 4 4 When Carlson Survey Desktop is ready to download the following dialog box will appear Ready to Install Setup has enough information to start copying the program files IF pau want to review or change any settings click Back IF you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings Autodesk Land Development Desktop is found in folder C Program FilessLand Desktop 004 The Carlson Survey Desktop will be placed in CarlsonSurvey subdirectory in that folder Back Cancel Note Carlson Survey Desktop installs itself as a subdirectory within Autodesk Autodesk Land Desktop To verify that this directory has installed correctly a check may be done within Autodesk Land Desktop from the command line type Options Select the File tab within the Options dialog Select Support File Search Path Depending on your operating system and AutoCAD software you should see a file path that reads C Program Files Land Desktop 2004 SurveyDesktop Support Installing Carlson Survey Desktop 5 E Options Current profile Land Desktop Current drawing Test l dwg Filez Support File Search Path C Program Files Land Desktop 0065 urve Desktops Support C Documents and Settings jdipintes amp pplication Data 4utodesk autodesk La Ago C Program Files Land Desktop 005 support l Penna C Program Fi
4. The angle balance report shows the unadjusted points the unadjusted closure the angular error the adjusted points and then the adjusted closure Typically but not always applying the angle balance correction will improve the traverse closure Compass Crandall Transit These process methods apply the selected rule to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates After adjusting the traverse the sideshots are also recalculated The closure error is calculated as the difference between the closing shot and a reference point The closing shot is specified as a type CL or CL AB record in the raw file If no CL record is found in the raw file then the program will prompt for which traverse shot to use as the closing shot The foresight point is used as the closing coordinate The reference point can be specified by point number or by entering the northing easting and elevation The process results report shows the unadjusted points closure error adjustments to each traverse point and adjusted point Prepare Least Squares Data From the raw file data this routine makes initial calculations for the coordinate points in the traverse This data along with the control point coordinates and angle and distance measurements is stored to a data file with the same name as the current RW5 file except with a LSQ extension ie survey lsq goes with survey rw5 The constraints of the routine are All angle readings must be in angle right mode The
5. Beginning Station F Sort Report by Stations Station Type Type of Curve Input Method ie 1 00 Roadway f Points C 12000 f 100 Railroad Station Offset 1 Grade Elevation From Points Reports the horizontal distance and cut fill between two points The points to compare can be in the same coordinate file or separate files For the same coordinate file option two ranges of point numbers are compared For the separate file option the point numbers are used to match points between the files 3D Polyline When using a 3D polyline for the grade elevation the command calculates the elevation along the polyline at the position perpendicular from the point Triangulation File For triangulation of surface files the design elevation is determined by the surface file at the point 2 Use Report Formatter Used to customize the report layout and to output the report data to Microsoft Excel or ACCESS 3 Decimals Controls the decimal precision used 4 Grade to Process Uses the top surface or various subgrades 5 Define Centerline by Contain the station settings Polyline Selects a polyline in the drawing Chapter 11 Cut Sheet 214 Points Uses points representing the centerline Alignment Uses a project alignment None Centerline 1s not used 6 Beginning Station Used when defining a centerline by points or by selecting a polyline Enter the beginning station 7 Sort Rep
6. Boundary Polyline 245 These three polylines are created from original linework by clicking at shown locations Keyboard Command boundpl Prerequisite Entities Shrink Wrap Entities Function This command creates a closed polyline which encloses a given set of entities The resulting polyline is created in the current layer The program works on either point entities or polylines For points the program creates a closed polyline through the points around the perimeter of the area defined by the points For polylines the shrink wrap polyline follows the outside border of the selected polylines The polylines that are processed have to be connected to be shrink wrapped The snap tolerance is the maximum gap that will be joined to make the closed polyline For open polylines as in the bottom figure the Gap method works better as it jumps across the gaps and connects the end points Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 246 Prompts Shrink wrap across gaps or bounded linework only lt Gap gt Bound G Shrink wrap layer lt FINAL gt Select points and linework to shrink wrap Select objects select entities to process Reading points 46 Inserted 46 points Inserted 23 breakline segments Perimeter reduction level 0 3 0 None 3 Most lt 2 gt 2 Reduce Perimeter Pass 1 Removed 5 Reduce Perimeter Pass 2 Removed 3 Reduce Perimeter Pass 3 Removed 4 Reduce Perimeter Pass 4 Removed 2 Reduce Perimeter Pass 5 Rem
7. C ODBC Data sources Misc database formats After selecting the format of the destination file select the continue button and the file to save dialog will appear Input the file name to save the type will be automatically selected based upon the destination format Edit Process Raw File 105 File to Save to File name Save as type sy Cancel Merge Report This options merges the current report with existing reports This option is to be used in conjunction with the Save Report command For example process the file and save the report When processing again select the Merge Report option and specify the previous report file created The resulting report will have the current data as well as the previous data Save Report This option save the current report to the specified file Report Angle Format This option controls the angle format displayed on the process result report The op tion of By Raw File will display the angles in the format that is contained in the rawfile The Bearing option will display the angle in a bearing format The Azimuth option will display the azimuth of the measurement and the Angle Right option will display the angle right measurement of the observation Decimal Places for Report This option controls the number of decimal places for the reported data Report Closure This option determines whether the closure report will be displayed after processing If processing a topo survey where the
8. Function This command will calculate and report the area of multiple polylines A typical report is shown below Keyboard Command plarea Prerequisite Set Area Label Defaults Chapter 13 Area Commands 228 File Name sp ptarea lsp Polyline Area 05 19 2002 13 56 Polyline Area 9392 8 sq meters Polyline Perimeter 572 17 meters Polyline Area 27808 4 sq meters Polyline Perimeter 847 85 meters Total Area 37201 2 meters Total Perimeter 1420 02 meters Hinged Area Function This command allows you to determine the dimensions of a figure when the area is fixed and three or more sides are known You define the figure by selecting a closed polyline or by picking the known points and curves The command then prompts you for the area to be solved in square units or acres Prompts Define area by points or closed polyline Points lt Linework gt Press Enter Select polyline segment to adjust Select the segment Select hinge point endp Select the hinge point Keep existing polyline Yes lt No gt Press Enter Acres Enter target area s f A Enter A to specify the desired area in acres Enter target area acres 14 N mM ALUNE Hinge Point Segment to adjust Adjusted segment Prerequisite A closed perimeter polyline Keyboard Command HAREA Sliding Side Area Function Hinged Area 229 This command adjusts one side of a polyline to meet a specified area e The existing are
9. New install or maintenance upgrade of Carlson Software If you are installing CSD for the first time choose this Home use See License Agreement Choose this reason 1f you are installing on your home computer See your license agreement for more details Re Installation of Carlson Software Choose this 1f you are re installing on the same computer with no modifications Windows or AutoCAD upgrade Choose this reason if you are re installing CSD after installing a new version of Microsoft Windows New Hardware Choose this if you are installing CSD on a new computer or if your existing computer has had some of its hardware replaced such as the hard disk network adapter etc After completing Reason for Installation select Next Registration Wizard E Reg Method Install Info User Info Authorize User Name ohn Doe 000000 0 Compary ohn Doe Surveying 000 Serial Number po00 00000 00000 0000 Phone Number B00555422 0 Fax Humber B00555432 0 E Mail Address johndeeGiohndeesumewnaerg System Fingerprint Wir 38537312 Disk 131137804 MAC 03 4 7 48 23 38 AutoCAD S N OO0 O0000000 Chapter 1 Product Overview 10 3 Enter the required information into the dialog as shown above e If you are using the Form method for registration press the Print Fax Sheet button to print out the form You may fax your registration to 606 564 9525 or mail it to Carlson Software 102 W Second St Suite 200 Maysv
10. Report Each State Plane Scale This option becomes available if the Calculate State Plane Factor at Each Setup has been selected With this option on the scale factor at each point will be shown in the process results report Scale Factor This value is multiplied by the slope distance for the traverse and sideshot records Correct for Earth Curvature This option adjusts the calculated points for the effect of the Earth s curvature Typically this adjustment is small and adjusts the elevation more than the horizontal Report Output There are three report output options contained in the raw editor the Standard Report Viewer the Custom Report Formatter and the Tabular Report Viewer Each is documented below The Standard Report Viewer is the default report viewer throughout the program Any routine that generates a report has this option and the data contained in the report depends upon the routine executed The report viewer is also a text editor It allows for addition and deletion of text in order to customize the report for printing or for saving to a particular format for a file Options to print send to the screen in the drawing window as text or save to a file are available Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 100 SurvCADD Edit C scad7005 USER scadrprt tmp Ele Edi Settings p Es gt a a Open Save Print Exit Fifid Screen Process No Adjust Results 02 03 2005 19 41 Raw file gt C ASHOW surveyl rw5 CRD file gt C scad2005
11. Up If a symbol is selected this moves the symbol up into the next category If a category is selected this moves the category up in the list Down If a symbol is selected this moves the symbol down into the next category If a category 1s selected this moves the category down in the list Edit Symbol Library 259 Create Symbol Allows you to select drawing entities to create a new symbol The symbol should be drawn at unit size scale 1 1 because CSD will scale the symbol by the current drawing scale automatically when the symbol is used Import Symbols Allows you to select existing drawing DWG files to populate the selected category If the files you select are not in the CSD SUP directory the program will offer an option of copying them there Save Saves the symbol library list Exit Exit the dialog If there are unsaved changes you will be prompted to save NOTE The symbol library is stored in an ASCII file named symbols dta in the Carlson Survey USER directory Prerequisite Field to Finish file with codes defined with Multi Point Symbols Keyboard Command EDITPTSYM Chapter 16 Symbols Commands 260 Twist Screen Commands 17 Twist Screen Standard Function This command will twist the screen orientation to where something other than the north direction 1s toward the top of the screen drawing It does not do a coordinate rotation the drawing coordinates remain unchanged Use commands on the Points me
12. With Columnar Format otf the report is displayed as follows Edit C scad2Z005 USER scadrprt tmp File Edit Settings Open Save Print Exit Fid Screen BackPt 21 OccupyPt 1 Point 2 HorzAngle AR133 53 30 SlopeDist 711 320 ZenithAng 89 40 57 Northing 5013 759 Easting 5711 176 Elev 103 262 BackPt 1 OccupyPt 2 Point 3 HorzAngle AR262 54 44 SlopeDist 457 761 ZenithAng 89 32 41 Northing 4560 688 Easting 5776 433 Elev 106 329 The Auto Width option displays each column width based upon the data contained within it The Fixed Width option allows for a specified column width for each field of data Totals Only This option does not apply to the process raw data results but is useful in other reports to report total values of certain data Total This field reports totals for various combinations of the attributes selected to report Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 102 The icons and tabs at the bottom of the Report Formatter Options dialog box provide display options Import Export options and User Attribute creation editing importing and exporting Report MS Excel Ir Display Report Tab Spread View Display Displays the selected data and field arrangement User Attrib Spread View Displays the selected data in MS Excel format View All Records BK P OC PT PNTNO HZANG a fi AR133 53 30 H 2 3 AR262 54 44 3 100
13. 279 Station Offset 245 253 Step 64 70 72 Surface 224 SurvCE 53 81 83 131 SurvCOGO 113 Surveyor s Assistant 99 100 SurvN ET Overview 258 SurvStar 81 Symbol Library 198 Symbols Commands 197 Symbol Size 145 199 TDS 2 53 87 89 106 113 195 Technical Support 290 Template 145 224 Text 20 107 116 165 210 245 246 248 Text Size 145 TO xi x11 35 36 41 46 89 90 103 224 to Points 192 Transit 124 Traverse 173 Triangulation 82 248 251 Trimble 94 TS x x11 101 144 168 194 199 201 286 Tutorial I 25 Tutorial IL 51 Tutorial II 63 Twist 21 Update 133 Vertial Adjustment Report 278 Vertical Angle 22 115 125 132 174 177 View 16 18 21 210 216 230 Wild 94 112 167 Wildsoft 93 112 Index 275
14. 29999977 29900977 0 29999977 20999077 299959977 0 299959977 29999977 29990977 Combined Factor 100002674 100002723 100002723 100002674 100002694 1000026 100002646 100002656 10000267 100002697 100002703 Cor Ang nd Factor Factor 000 2155 1 000027 9998007 000 2151 1 00002728 4 099900022 000 2158 1 00002823 099990022 000 2155 1 00002781 29990977 000 21 51 1 00002724 X 059509073 000 2154 10000765 099990022 000 2153 100002752 0599909072 000 2152 100002742 05999000922 000 2154 10000768 099990022 000 2155 1000023 059999072 Combined Fac tor 100002701 1 00002647 1000002744 10000027012 100002645 1 0000687 100002674 1100002664 1 00002685 1000002705 The remainder of the report is the same as the Local Coordinate System report that follows Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 138 Sample Coordinate System Report Tue Jul 16 21 03 16 2002 Input File D Isdata cgstar CGSTAR CGR Output File D Isdata cgstar CGSTAR RPT Curvature refraction correction ON Maximum iterations 10 Convergence Limit 0 001000 Local Coordinate System Scale Factor 1 000000 Horizontal Units Meters Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 1 Backsight 5 Foresight 2 Low Angle 109 19 10 High Angle 109 19 17 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 2 Back
15. 4082 85 8198 97 375 35 RADIUS 46 96 LENGTH 68 52 CHORD 62 60 DELTA 83 36 22 CHORD BRG N 63 11 04 E PC R N 14 59 15 E PER N 683707 W RADIUS POINT 4128 21 8211 11 4111 09 8254 84 443 87 N 21 22 53 E 40 93 4149 21 8269 76 484 80 Closure Error Distance 131 85 Error Bearing S 65 20 58 W Remove Polyline Vertex 255 Closure Precision 1 in 1 2 Total Distance gt 159 80 Polyline Area 3396 5 sq ft 0 08 acres Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command PLREPORT Polyline Info Function This command reports the length and elevation of the selected line or polyline Prompts 1 Pick Polyline or Line pick a polyline Polyline length 145 43 Elevation 100 0 Prerequisite None Keyboard Command POLYLEN Polyline to RWS File Function This command generates a raw data RW5 file for the selected polyline e This file can be opened using Edit Process Raw Data File which allows you to process the raw data RW5 file to generate coordinate points calculate closure and perform coordinate adjustments by the compass crandall transit and least squares adjustment features Prompts 1 RW5 File to Write Standard Windows File Selection Dialog Choose file location and name 2 Select Polyline To Process Select Polyline Keyboard Command pl2RW5 Prerequisite a polyline File Name sp cogoutil arx Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 256 Symbols Commands 16 Insert Symbols Function This command insert
16. Network Least Squares Settings Coordinate System Adjustment Standard Errors Output Options Least Squares Adjustment Options Maxinur Iterations 0 001 Convergence Threshhald Apply Horizontal Adjustment Apply Vertical Adjustment Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses Use Initial Backsight As Reference Azimuth Raw Data Preprocessing Apply Curvature and Retraction Correction Vert Dist Tolerance Horz Dist Tolerance Horz Angle Tolerance DO MMSS For more information on the content of this dialog box please review the SurvNET chapter of this manual Step 7 Choose the Standard Errors tab to review the standard error settings The standard error settings should look as follows before proceeding to the next step Standard errors are an estimate of the different errors you would expect to obtain based on the type equipment and field procedures you used to collect the raw data For example if you are using a 5 second theodolite you could expect the angles to be measured within 5 seconds Reading error Network Least 5quares Settings Coordinate system Adjustment Standard Errars Output Options Angle Standard Errors Horizontal Pointing sec Reading sec Reading sec Instrument and Target Standard Errors Distance Standard Error Vertical Pointing sec Target Centering 0 005 Instrument Centering Target Height 0 010 Height of Instrument Direction Azimuth Standard Error
17. Set Symbol Text Size Entity Type 2 3D Polyline CO 3D and 20 C2 2D Polyline O Line O Points Only Distinct Point Layer Connection Order Sequential C2 Nearest Found Tie Open Unit Symbol 0 100 Symbol Size SS Distinct Symbol Layer pun 7 Mia Hard Breakline Smooth Palyline 2 Close C Random Rotate E You can also revise the default layers and linetypes Try this with the EP code Make the layer Road the entity a 2D Polyline and the linetype dashed Edit Field Code Definition Category Processing ON Code Full Hame AL P nl lir E Sue Description Set Linetype Set Symbol Text Size Entity Type C3 3D Polyline CO 30 and 20 2 2D Polyline C2 Line O Points Only Distinct Point Layer Connection Order Sequential C2 Nearest Found Tie Open Sequence Unit Symbol 0 100 Symbol Size IE C Distinct Symbol Layer nad Use Raw Description Bue 1 Line Width Smooth Palyline 2 Close Random Rotate E Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 27 You can also edit two at a time 1f the descriptions T B and TOPB both refer to top of bank To make a 3D Polyline in the layer TopOfBank select TB then hold down the Ctrl key and select TOPB also With both highlighted choose Edit Note that you have a smaller set of options based on yo
18. Undo Cut Copy Paste Find Replace Go To Delete Row Modify Measurements Undo This command undoes the last data entry or the last copy cut or delete command performed on keyboard entered data only This will not undo a change to the Type or Code columns nor a cut or copy command to a row Cut Standard windows cut command Removes data from editor and places it in the windows clipboard Copy Standard windows copy command Copies selected data to windows clipboard Edit Process Raw File 87 Delete Deletes selected data or row of data Will not delete headers 1f data 1s present below the header Find Tool to search and find a particular word letter numeric value or a combination of all Provides options to Match whole word only and or case Allows for a up or down directional search from the active cell in the editor Match case Direction a Down Cancel Replace Tool to search and replace a particular word letter numeric value of a combination of all Options to Match whole word only and or case is provided for the search criteria Provides further options to Replace individual items one at a time or to Replace All Search and Replace Find What Replace vith J Match whole word only Match case ETE Masse Go To Tool to advance the focus of the active cell to a specified line number Go To Line Line Number uo Delete Row This command deletes the r
19. Use Leica Format Data Paint Options FP Sort By Codes Highest point number 132 1 132 Paint range Field Code Match E Cancel Help e Code Table by CRD Creates code table definitions based on the data file field descriptions This is useful when creating a code table from scratch Code Definitions e Edit This command opens the Edit Field Code Definition dialog box shown below The currently high lighted code will be edited Chapter 5 Field to Finish 152 Edit Field Code Definition Category Processing ON Code DEFAULT Additional 2D Palyline Layer Description C Use Raw Description Set Linetype Set Symbol Symbol Pts B ce pum pes Text Size 0 100 Symbol Size 0 100 Line width LU Du Entity Type Connection Order We EI gt Hard bear E C3 3D Polyline 5 3D and 20 2D Poluline Line Points Only d sd L Random Rotate Distinct Point Layer Distinct Symbol Layer ae Category This optional field that can to used to help organize your codes A category is not used for processing and only is useful in viewing and printing Sequence Specifies a sequence type code Sequences are described above in this section Define Code Sequence Sets the code names that make up the sequence Processing ON This toggle controls whether this code will be processed Code Name The key name that identities the code and is
20. Vertial Adjustment Report The following sections display the adjusted elevations the computed standard deviations of the computed elevations the final adjusted elevation difference measurements and their residuals Finally the computed sideshot elevations are displayed State Plane Reduction Report File When reducing to a state plane coordinate system there will be additional information displayed in the report file Note the heading of the report It indicates that the project is being reduced into the Florida east zone of the 1983 State Plane Coordinate System The heading shows that the computed elevation factor is based on a project elevation of 5 meters Tue Jul 16 21 25 34 2002 Input File D Isdata cgstar CGSTAR RW5 Curvature refraction correction ON Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 136 Maximum iterations 10 Convergence Limit 0 001000 1983 State Plane Coordinates zone 0901 Florida East Elevation factor computed from project elevation 5 000000 Elevation Units Meters Horizontal Units Meters The first distance listing in the Unadjusted Observation section of the report shows the unadjusted ground distances Distances 14 Observations There is a new section that displays the reduced unadjusted grid distances Fromm 5 ta E 21 To Sta Ground Dist 20 4l ae 290 45 292 214 52 383 324 138 275 603 134663 116 073 50 115 309 647 129 985 126 010 10 000 12
21. 11 525 527 0 EP second point on curve 12 531 533 0 EP end point of curve NOTE Point 12 above can be another PC with descriptions EP PC to create a reverse or compound curve see the example graphic below e PT A special code that can be used with PC to define a curve with more than three points Starting at the point with the PC the program will look for a PT If the PT is found all the points between the PC and PT are used for the curve which is drawn as a smoothed polyline that passes through all points and only curves the polyline between points If no PT is found then the regular three point arc is applied co clo cb cb pc c4 18 19 Multiple 3 Point Curves 5 0 with Close OM ee 21 J ch 30 ul 26 ed Reverse Curve ep ep ep pc 46 37 40 33 34 32 Ew ew 28 399 pt Ew ew pc ew g Multiple Point Curve PT code Field to Finish 157 CLO Forces the lines drawn between a series of points with the same code to close back to the first point with the same code e g shots 1 4 all have the BLD description with the exception of point 4 Its description is BLD CLO This forces the linework drawn for the BLD code to close back to point 1 which is the first point with the description of BLD NE Represents no elevation A point with this special code is located at zero elevation OH amp OV The codes OH and OV stand for offset horizontal and offset vertical These offset codes apply to 2D and 3D polylines A sin
22. Before installing Carlson Survey Desktop close all other applications Make sure that you disable any virus checking software Refer to your virus software documentation for instructions 1 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive e If Autorun is enabled the setup process will begin automatically when you insert the CD ROM e To stop Autorun from starting the installation process automatically hold down the SHIFT key when you insert the CD e To start the install process without using Autorun from the Start menu Windows choose Run Enter the CD ROM drive letter and setup e g d 1 setup 2 Windows will begin the installation of Carlson Survey Desktop Depending on your operating system the initial window will look something like this A Cartson Sur vey Desktop Setup Carlson Survey Desktop www carlsonsw com Zar 1 EA i b CSD Survey Desktop Tha an ratal for Cadeon Survey Desktop Tot Autodesk Land Development Desktop The information dialog box initially displayed in the setup process 1s shown below Installing Carlson Survey Desktop 9 This i an install for Carlson Survey Desktop for Autodesk Land Development Desktop lt Back Next gt Cancel Select Next to continue the Setup process 3 Choose which version of AutoCAD you are using Select AutoCAD version Which version of Autodesk LOT will be used with Carlson Survey Desktop LOT 2004 C LOT Release 3 lt Back Cancel
23. Entity Type Connection Order Separate Layers 3D Polline fe Hone 3D and 20 y Points 2D Polpline Symbols C Line C Both f Points Only Attribute Layout ID NS Ele D ecimals oo l psi w Locate Pts on Real Z Random Rotate E Distinct Point Layer Cancel Help Cut Removes the highlighted code definitions from the list and puts them in a buffer for retrieval with Paste e Paste Inserts code definitions placed in the buffer by the Cut command These codes will be inserted after the row of the currently highlighted code or at the top Search Allows you to search for a specific code in the list e Save Saves the Field to Finish code list FLD file Process e Draw Leads to a dialog shown below that controls the range of points to process With CSD this dialog also controls whether only points only lines or lines and points are plotted If you choose to plot lines only this will be the default until changed Field to Finish 155 Range of Point Numbers to Process Highest point number 300 Range of Points 1 7300 Entities to Draw Points Lines Symbols Locate Linework on Real lt Axis O Dr O Off By Code PC PT Curve Type 5 Bezier O Tangent Arcs Layer Prefix Erase Existing Field to Finish Linework Pause on Undefined Codes Auto Zoom Extents Point Motes Range of Points Specifies the range of points to draw Point Groups Point Gro
24. If Vertical Adjustment is not checked elevations will not be Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 128 calculated Load Common option included in all tabbed dialogs described below Click this button to load an existing NLQ file Input Files Network Least Squares Settings scien Level Raw File Click to include existing LEV file for input GPS Vector File Click to include and existing GSPS vector file for input GPS Vector File Format Select from ASCII StarNET Thales or Leica Preprocessing SurvNET 129 Network Least Squares Settings When multiple angles or distances are measured to a point a single average angle horizontal distance component and vertical difference component will be calculated for use in the least squares adjustment You may set the tolerances so that you are warned if any angle or distance exceeds these values Tolerance warnings will be shown in the report after processing the data Horz Dist Slope Tolerance Display a warning if the difference between highest and lowest horizontal distance component exceeds this value Horz Angle Tolerance Display a warning if the difference between the highest and lowest horizontal angle exceeds this value Tie Point Code Enter code Edit Create Closure File With this feature you can edit an existing or create a new CLS closure file Standard Errors Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 130 Network Least Squares Setting
25. Line On Off Function This command toggles line plotting on and off for the Traverse command If line drawing is turned on the Line On Off menu option will have a check mark character next to it Prerequisite None Keyboard Command LINEONOFF Chapter 6 COGO Commands 170 Point Commands Draw Locate Points Function The Draw Locate Point dialog shown below allows you to insert both new and existing points into the drawing Create new points by selecting points on the screen or by entering northing and easting coordinates Place existing points by entering point numbers that reference the current project point database Draw Locate Points E Symbol Name SPT 4 Select Symbol Rotation Azimuth Layer by Desc Laver Preta ETE Draw Nodes Only Eley Text Only Locate within Polline Distance Coordinate Range Point Prompt L abel Settings v Descriptions Notes Bl leet ve Use Locate on Real Z Axis Decimals 0 00 W Elevations W Labelzeros Point Number Settings Point Numbers Automatic Point Numbering Wildcard match of pt description F M Erase Duplicates Layer Mame PHTS Select Laver Draw All Draw Point Group Enter and Assign Screen Pick Cancel Help Starting Point Number Using the Main Draw Locate Points Dialog Selecting Point Symbol In the Draw Locate Point dialog you must select the point symbol and select pla
26. Make 5 35 64 84 88 89 165 212 214 Maptech 113 Multi Point Symbols 201 National Geodetic Survey 130 Nearest Found 137 Network Least Squares 64 Network Least Squares Adjustment 257 Network Least Squares Settings 265 Nikon 97 113 Nodes 165 Occupy Point 172 Offset 44 227 245 250 254 Offset 3D Polyline 222 OnLine Help 290 Options 8 20 28 41 42 69 96 171 172 174 175 177 178 198 199 218 244 270 Origin 227 Parameters 205 Pick Intersection Points 178 Planned Field to Finish 52 Plot 205 Point on Arc 186 Point Defaults 23 178 Point Description 175 176 206 245 Point Layer 62 147 Point Notes 122 125 Point Protect 122 126 174 177 Points 17 22 23 28 29 32 39 47 53 56 57 59 60 80 115 123 136 141 145 149 150 158 160 164 170 174 178 183 186 187 190 191 193 194 204 206 239 241 245 249 251 255 262 Points Commands 163 Polyline 35 36 39 41 42 48 145 147 165 175 181 209 215 216 227 231 236 238 246 248 249 251 252 Polyline Commands 217 Polyline Info 231 Polyline Report 230 Polyline to RW5 File 231 Polylines 219 Polyline Vertices 226 Precision 146 207 231 270 271 Prepare 259 Prepare Least Squares Data 259 Process 38 55 64 66 70 80 83 86 89 94 100 104 107 108 110 111 121 127 131 133 134 136 140 144 148 194 199 205 232 252 2539 201 272 Process
27. Station Elevation 510 874 746 This is the final step in the tutorial The final adjusted coordinates are now stored in the current project point database and can now be used for mapping and design Chapter 2 Tutorials 58 Data Collectors Data Collectors Function The Data Collector Programs dialog box shown here allows you to perform two main functions for a variety of popular data collectors First this command transfers uploads and downloads data between the data collector and Carlson Survey Desktop CSD Second this command converts data formats between the data collector format and CSD format If you already have the data file on the computer you can skip the transfer function and just run the conversion function The transfer function does the conversion automatically In most cases the download from the data collector produces a RWS3 file field notes and or a Points mdb file coordinate points Several of the download programs allow you to automatically run the Edit Process Raw File command after you download raw data You can also send or upload coordinates from the current project point database Data Collector Programs EC X SurvCE FastSurveu 2 COField TOS SMI Sokkia SOA Surveyors Assistant Leica Nikon Geodimeter Topcon 10 31 0 220 6PT 2000 NOTE CSD downlaods raw survey notes and processes them in the RW5 format However the RW5 files may at any time be
28. Transit Least Squares Prepare Least Squares Data Edit Least Squares Data Process Least Squares Data vw AAA Stadia aP5 sur MET Process Settings Lesson Two Least Squares Settings Network Least Squares 49 Step 5 The Network Least Squares Settings dialog box is displayed In this dialog box the different settings required for the Least Squares reduction are available The Load button at the bottom of the screen allows the user to recall previously saved settings The Save button allows the user to save the current settings Press Cancel to return to the raw data editor When all the settings are set as desired press OK to process the raw data For the purpose of this tutorial the Coordinate System settings should look as follows before proceeding to the next step Network Least Squares Settings Scale Factor 1 00000000 Coordinate System C2 Local C State Plane 27 State Plane 83 Zone Horizontal Units Compute Elevation Factor From Project Elevation 9 Raw Data Project Elevation me e E Elevation Units US Feet For more information on the content of this dialog box please review the SurvNET chapter of this man ual Step 6 Choose the Adjustment tab to review the least squares adjustment settings For the purpose of this tutorial the Adjustment settings should look as follows before proceeding to the next step Chapter 2 Tutorials 50
29. e Prompttor elevation slope Use surface model from file Use current drawing layer ever PY see Wee Auta Zaam mode Never 8 Proximity C Always Froximity zoom Level 7s 10 00 Cancel The Show Options on Startup dialog will appear every time the command is run unless this is turned off If it is off then the last settings will apply To get the box back choose O for Options Prompt for Elevation Slope controls whether the elevation of each picked point will be entered in or hit S for slope to draw a slope line Use Surface Model from File will use a grid or triangulation file as a surface model Wherever the points are picked on the surface the elevation of the surface will be assigned to the polyline If Use Current Drawing Layer is on the layer of the new polyline will be the current layer If the current layer is not used the Layer option allows you to Select from a list or Pick from the screen There are 3 options under Auto Zoom Mode Never will not zoom to the last point picked Proximity will zoom to the percent proximity set below Always will always zoom center on every point If the Proximity Auto Zoom mode is checked the percent of the proximity is set in the Proximity Zoom Level box Prompts Continue Extend Follow Options lt Pick point or point numbers pick a point Elevation lt 0 00 gt 435 Z 435 00 Hz dist 0 00 Slope dist 0 00 Slope 0 0 Ratio 0 0 1 Arc Direction C
30. fld Process Eagle Point Coding Eagle Point Codes Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix as Points Only Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only Max Length for Linework BOO O10 Special Codes For Character For Character For Character For Character For NE Code Ma Elevation For Character Lnderzcore For OH Code Offset Horiz For OY Code Offset Vertical For JOG code For JPN Code Join ta Point Mame For 5 Code Symbol Size po E For ROT Code Rotate For SMO Code Smooth For CLO Code Close For RECT Code Close Rectangular For 4 Code Azimuth For DIST Code Distance For PC Code Start Curve For PT Code End Curve For 7 Code Start Linework For Code End Linework For Hulti Point HD Code For Multi Point SRO Code Cancel Select Specifies a new code table The name of the current table is shown in the field to the right of this button Process Eagle Point Coding When selected this option allows you to switch from interpreting coordi nate files based on the Field to Finish method to interpreting coordinate files using the Eagle Point Data Collection method Currently the supported designators include Line Curve Close Line Stop Line Insert Description and Bearing Close Also supported is the ability to recognize overwriting of descriptions similar to Eagle Point by using the space separator instead of the Insert Description designator Examples of supported
31. onzas era AA 250 Draw Polyline DHDS s s s x woo de vou E EUR UE AUR Ee Rx deo d EUR e ap kas de cs 250 Reverso OWING 22 32 9959W 2 4X4 94952 55999 ee ee ee 251 Reduce Polyline VSTUCES uuo so ras daed ee 9 9 923959 5945445 731 4 25 Edit Poly line SECCION s es ons 3 9 5x 9 A omo R A wo ow wow aru ds 254 Density Polyline Vertices 2 6 ad vx nox X xxu x Bow oom Ro ee e OE do RR E qo d 252 Contents V Sel EOI Me Orom s nox EX S R SUE LAA AAA sd Remove Pole AOS soso passos datar ARA Remove Polyline Segment s adu uw v dou AAA as oS Remove Foliyline WOeBeX oes seese arce 1 A 9S x63 As Pobline Report axones ewe ee aaa EU Polviiie IMIG y nos 9493 9 X59 9 RR SET Xa3943599159543J93J 993 Pob lne to RW OPC v sao uh wes orbe Ow E uk PIE E dd EUR NOE P moe HL A Chapter 16 Symbols Commands Insert SymbDO S xu 60x 9 x x3 ca se sas a e PE Edit Symbol Library 4 20d 2m wA rara dada 4 2 2 5 Be Chapter 17 Twist Screen Commands Twist Screen Standard iu uoo om hee eee X o RR O3 40 49 43 AA Twastereen Lane Polyiine or Texte uscar x3 ene eee EERE SS Twist 5creen Surveyor e sados 99 2 43 5 sd dou s a e d we hw i Restore Due North cll ln Chapter 18 Conversion Commands Convert Points ouo aseo Import Sondesk Centerline s s sss o9 ox Sox POE OX OS 9 93 x X 52004 Chapter 19 Configure Carlson Survey Desktop Configure Carlson Survey Desktop o on 64525868485 whee woo ROO xu Ax X
32. screen With the points already on the screen as a reference select Draw found under Process in the Field to Finish Chapter 2 Tutorials 30 dialog and under Entities to Draw de select Points and select Lines and Symbols as shown here Range of Point Numbers to Process Highest point number 300 Range of Points 1 7300 Entities to Draw Points Lines Symbols Locate Linework on Real lt Axis Q Dr O Off By Code PC PT Curve Type 5 Bezier Tangent Arcs Layer Prefix Erase Existing Field to Finish Linework Pause on Undefined Codes Auto Zoom Extents Point Motes If we freeze the points the following linework and point symbols have been created We re done with our reactive Field to Finish All that is necessary now 1s a little editing using some of the Polyline Utilities found in CSD The Polyline Utilities of Carlson Survey Desktop Reactive Field to Finish will usually require some editing True Field to Finish techniques involve codes for starting and stopping polylines creating rectangles for buildings closing polylines and even automatically creating offset polylines A file that contains only raw descriptions with no special instruction codes can produce linework and symbols but there is usually a little chaos that needs correction CSD s polyline utilities are perfect for this cleanup process Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 31 The blue ditch line Layer 18 can be set
33. sec North Coordinate 0 001 East Coordinate For more information on the content of this dialog box please review the SurvNET chapter of this manual Step 8 Choose the Output Options tab to review the output settings For the purpose of this tutorial the Output Options settings should look as follows before proceeding to the next step These settings apply only to the output of data to the report files These settings do not affect computational precision Press OK and the least squares Network Least Squares 51 adjustment will be performed Network Least 5quares Settings Marth E ast Precision Elevation Precision Distance Precision Direction Precision Direction Format Coordinate Display North East E Mull Elevation 999999590 For more information on the content of this dialog box please review the SurvNET chapter of this manual Lesson Three Least Squares Processing Step 9 After pressing OK from the previous dialog box the Least Squares adjustment is performed and the Network Least Squares Results window 1s displayed If the solution converged correctly the report should look similar to the following window If there were errors or the solution did not converge an error message dialog will be generated If there are errors you will need to return to the r
34. 0000 Dy 0 0000 Dz 0 0000 Rotate seconds Rx 0 000000 Ry 0 000000 Rz 0000000 Scale ppm 000000000 Projection Type Transverse Mercator dl Projection Settings Central Meridian dd mmssE W 10 00000000 False Latitude dd mmssy N S Scale Factor 1 00000000 Zone Width 16 0 o False Easting 0 0000 False Northing 0 0000 Latitude Origin dd mmss N S 00000000 Longitude Origin dd mmss E W o 00000009 g Cancel Edit Process Raw File 111 Enter a name for your system e g PRVI for Puerto Rico Virgin Islands then select a Projection type and enter the appropriate parameters Note that all latitude and longitude values are in Degrees Minutes and Seconds dd mmss and False Northing and False Eastings are always presented in meters Define a Datum shift by selecting the Select Datum radial button You may select a predefined Ellipsoid or set your own parameters by typing in a new ellipsoid name in the Ellipsoid field and entering values for a and 1 f When you enter in a new Ellipsoid name the Datum name field will be blank The values for Dx Dy Dz Rx Ry and Rz and scale are to WGS84 If the values you have are from WGS84 simply reverse the sign of each value positive becomes negative and vice versa You may save your system to a udp file To Load a user defined coordinate system from a file select the Load radial button A list of user defined systems
35. 0147 21 116 0727 O O 0 014 5 309 649 0 0003 0 0 0102 10 129 9050 0 0107 0 9 0 0107 11 126 0102 0 0000 0 0 0108 12 129 437 0 011 0 9 0 0108 3 144 6625 D 0118 d 0 0113 Occ Sta Fo Sta Angle Residual StdRes StdDevisec 1 2 109 1921 74 0 6 05 4 3 006 0736 15 5 1 2 5 5 3 4 1240752 1 5 0 1 B 3 20 185 2956 O 20 6 20 Zl 120 126 0 D 4435 4 5 093 0211 0 1 O 89 5 10 38 26 44 41 0 2 10 4 10 11 241 5632 25 0 3 amp d 11 12 1145633 n 0 7 a l 12 3 140 3832 75 U9 Te 3 2 335 5438 65 0s Ta 5 1 117 3100 17 2 1 3 03 StdRes StdDevisec O 5 Statistics Solution converged in 2 iterations Degrees of freedom 6 Reference variance 1 83 Standard error unit Weight 1 35 Passed the Chi Square test at the 95 significance level 0 680 lt 10 955 lt 18 550 Sideshots From To Bearing Dist H E E H 55 32116 E 523882 10236 2474 10240 217 al LE H 29 50 17 W 50115 10111514 8839 54 10 15 H 86 0 277W 10 10229 54 Ban 574 LEAST SQUARES VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT Tue Jul 16 21 03 16 2002 Input File D Isdata cgstar CGSTAR CGR Output File D Msdata cgstar CGSTAR RPT Curvature refraction correction ON FIXED VERTICAL BENCHMARKS Station Elevation 900 0000 POINTS TO BE ADJUSTED Station 5 2 3 4 10 11 12 MEASUREMENT SUMMARY ote H 0 0114 0 03 0 0135 StLiev E 0 0136 0 0383 0 019 SurvNET 143 From To Elew Dif Length unadjusted weights l 5 7 504 290 4
36. 4097 356 8200 426 397 873 129 4097 355 8200 425 397 873 130 4097 351 8200 422 397 873 131 4091 548 8196 78 397 879 132 4089 490 8195 390 397 691 133 4067 449 8194 084 397 585 134 4074 021 8185 488 396 248 135 4060 192 8176 635 395 556 136 4153 171 8253 966 401 491 Humber of points listed 16 You may define new columns as equations based on existing columns Click on the Edit User Attributes button to add a new field name A list of the existing attributes is available for reference User attributes may have one of several summation options similar to program generated ones although these options are set by program The summation level is defined by the Total pop up list in the middle of the dialog By default only the grand total will be displayed at the bottom of the list Selecting the next item in that box provides you with subtotals added each time the value in the first column is changed Use this kind of summation if the corresponding column is sorted For example if the first column is Area Name and it is sorted and Total is set to Grand Area Name the report will have a sub total for each distinct area name This feature makes the Report Formatter a flexible tool for results exploration before ever using a spreadsheet Various forms of reports may be saved and recalled using controls in the top line of the dialog To save a new version of the format type in a new name or use default to overwrite the old one and click on t
37. 42 00000000 43 00000000 44 00000000 45 00000000 110007 00000006 21 124 25827090 22 104 09504550 31 1 00106228 51 0 0012 000 110008 00000007 21 124 27151500 22 104 09312240 31 1 00106066 51 0 0012 000 Portion of typical SMI raw data file CM Definitions SS Side Shot TR Traverse OC Occupied Coordinates PC Point Coordinates CM Comment OS Occupied Station TS time stamp e electronic m manual CM TS TUE 04 09 91 09 41 25P PC 1 5000 00000 5000 00000 0 00000 SS e HI 4 000 HR 5 000 PIPE F 012 BAZ 0 00000 AR 0 00040 ZA 91 24330 SD 92 020 SS e HI 0 000 HR 0 000 BC BR FRAME IST 013 BAZ 0 00000 AR 28 47220 ZA 91 20250 SD 65 240 Portion of typical PC COGO raw data file x NEW SET UP INST AT 1 359 59 59 ON 4 Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 124 L ANG 1000 4 1 77 18 52 4 44 1000 WALL 283 22 L ANG 1001 4 1 55 44 28 9 8 x 1001 WALL 283 28 L ANG 1002 4 1 38 37 8 15 89 1002 WALL 283 48 L ANG 1008 4 1 27 18 34 123 82 1008 WALL 287 75 Portion of typical Nikon raw data file MP NOR 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 1 CO Temp 111F Press 29 9inHg Prism 666 23 May 2000 10 30 36 ST NOR 1 5 0000 0 0000 0 0000 SS 1 5 0000 131 0605 91 3744 88 4935 10 36 15 CL1 SS 2 5 0000 137 6770 90 2923 88 5236 10 36 50 CL1 Portion of typical MDL Laser raw data file D052097F04P521494P01P02 H32473V 0639R016202P03 H06687V 0706R014936P9 1 H03840V 0483R017380 Portion of typical Geodimeter raw data file S0ZHA
38. 5629 056 2310 114 5827 140 3524 325 5430 117 3042 2 tErr H Sth rr Sec 13 al 12 8 13 1 20 6 44 5 13 4 13 2 19 5 5 12 2 3 6 amp amp 5 13 atErm E rec Sta FS Sta 1 2 E 6 4 3 3 4 3 20 FI Zl Zl E 4 5 5 10 10 11 10 15 Ll 12 12 3 3 4 5 1 H 10000 10125 859 1 0206 625 10458 760 10435 346 10571 01 10668 042 10228 8544 10207041 103146245 10000 9738 222 10206 625 10002 881 O728 285 2025 415 40d TTA 9817 55 9941 14 10015112 0 001 0 0153 0 0082 0 0111 0 0183 0 0121 0 0274 0 0152 0 0143 0 0143 0 001 0 0102 0 0085 0 0183 0 0194 0 0268 0 0576 0 0135 0 0134 0 014 SurvNET 141 1 5 2 3 4 20 al 10 11 12 Adjusted Observations Adjusted Distances From 5 ta 1 1 2 3 3 EL 4 5 10 11 12 Adjusted Angles Ba sta 5 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 10 11 12 4 Adjusted Azimuths Dec Sta FS Sta Bearing Residual 1 2 H 45 00 00 E 0 Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 142 sera Mor xs ser Minor Axe Max Error Az 0 004 0 004 H 45 00 00 E D 067 0 043 HN 10 51 15 E 0 045 0 031 H 45 00 00 E 0 0 1 0 046 H TI SEUU E 0 104 0 050 H 47 240 E 0 119 0 078 H 72 08 02 E 0 174 0 102 H 6412751 E 0 075 0 04 HN 37 10 13 E 0 063 0 050 H 33 50 48 E 0 064 0 05 H 33 4 29 E To Sta Distance Residual StdRes StdDev 5 290 4621 0 0119 1 0 0104 4 393 2123 0 0012 01 0 0104 3 324 1736 0 0126 11 0 0103 4 275 59534 00101 09 0 0102 20 134 6627 O O 0
39. 7 Code Start Linework For Multi Point 2ND Code ac a c Cancel Change 7 to ST for start Many Autodesk Land Desktop users may prefer to use BEG for starting a new polyline or line Change CLO to CLS to close Now OK and select SAVEAS Save these changes as Tutorial2_2 or Tutorial2 2a so others can use this tutorial unaltered Back in Field to Finish select Draw Chapter 2 Tutorials 46 Then when you redraw the linework you obtain the more complete well defined drawing shown below You can also choose to plot both symbols and linework You can choose as well to erase the Autodesk Land Desktop style points and plot points symbols and linework with CSD s Field to Finish This will layerize not just linework and symbols but even the points as well Later on if you wish to freeze point layers it is advisable to define the points plotted within Field to Finish to Distinct Point Layers using the Edit option in Field to Finish Network Least Squares This tutorial 1s divided into four lessons covering the process of reducing and adjusting raw survey data into final adjusted coordinates using the SurvNET program The purpose of the tutorial is to describe the typical work flow used to process raw data from a data collector into final coordinates The tutorial will describe the reviewing and editing of the raw data prior to the processing of the raw data Next the least squares system settings will be described The next l
40. Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 110 GPS The process GPS routine allows for reduction of GPS records that reside in a raw RW5 file from latitude longitude and WGS84 Ellipsoid Height to State Plane or local coordinates When selected the GPS Settings dialog will appear as shown below GPS Settings Transformation One Point Alignment Azimuth Two Point Align Method Project Scale Factor Geoid To Apply Decimal Places far Report i u IS Feel x v Multiple Measurements To Same Point Use Last v GPS Projection Type Defines the datum coordinate system to be used for converting the latitude Longitude and WGS84 Ellipsoid height collected from the GPS receiver into Cartesian coordinates The supported projection types are State Plane 83 State Plane 27 UTM Lat Long Great Britain OSGB36 Australia New Zealand NZGD2000 New Zealand NZGD49 and France NTF GR3DF97A A User Defined option is also available for defining a user projection The supported geoids include Geoid99 USA Geoid03 USA EGM96 World GDA94 Australia CGG2000 HT 2 0 HT HT 1 01 Canada and SGMO02 Britain GeoUser Defined projections are supported To define a new projection select the Define Projection option This will bring up the following dialog User Defined Projection System Name Helmer 7 Parameter Transformation WGS84 To User Datum Datum Name World Geodetic System 1984 js prese w Ellipsoid wess Translate m Dx 0
41. Description 203 Chapter 9 Deed Commands 204 Station Offset Commands 10 Label Station Offset Function This command labels the station and offset of a point relative to a centerline e A polyline that represents the centerline or a centerline file CL is required before running this command The points to label can be picked on screen or specified by point number e As the cross hairs are moved the station and offset of the current position are displayed in real time in the corner of the drawing window The options for this command are set in the dialog box shown below Label Station Offset Settings a ae x Label Options Solna n EX IM C Add to Existing Prt Desc Label Text Only Label Position Automatic Leader Pick Location Type of Curve Roadway Curve Railroad Curve Layer Name 10 Select Text Size Scaler Beginning Station Max Offset to Calc station Decimals 0 00 Offset Decimals 0 00 Station Pret O e Station St 1 Right Offset Prefix a Fight Offset Suffix Left Offset Prefix Left Offset Suffis Station Label f Full Partial None Offset Label f Full Partial None station Type Centerline By s 1400 1 000 t 100 ie Polvline C Alignment Cancel Help 1 Label Options the two selections described below update the point descriptions and control the label format e Add to Existing Pnt Desc If you have points and
42. Desktop Fieldbook format However converting to Fieldbook is not necessary to utilize CSD s Field to Finish command SurvCE FastSurvey G2 Data Collection Download From SurvLE Coordinates Other Files Upload To SurveCE Coordinates Field To Finish Codes Triangulation Alignment Geoid Other Files Convert AMS To Fieldbook Baud 4800 Help Sometimes the conversions to Fieldbook form may take two steps as in the case of an SMI download shown below First convert the SMI RAW file to RWS then convert RW5 to Fieldbook Chapter 2 Tutorials 40 SMI HP 48 Data Collection Convert Hw To Fieldbook Baud Parity 1200 9 None O 2400 C3 4800 C2 Odd C 9600 19200 O Even Hun Edit Process Haw File NOTE With Autodesk Land Desktop it is the Fieldbook file complete with special note fields to do curves and start and stop lines that is needed for Field to Finish With CSD the point file drives Field to Finish The descriptions on the points do it all The raw file is used only for re calculating the coordinate data based on the selected method of adjustment eg Compass Rule with Angle Balance as an option or SurvNET Raw Survey File Editing and Processing One of the great strengths of CSD is its intelligent raw editor It is good survey practice to recalculate coordinates based on the raw data That is why the Edit Process Raw Data File command is placed between Data Collectors and Field to Finish in the Surve
43. Feet Point Protect B Backsight CO 10 20 30 40 F Foresight 5 Liscad There are two types of Leica transfers GIF 10 and GeoCom for all other Leica instruments The type is set in the Equipment Type field on the main dialog For transferring with the Leica instruments the GeoCom program shows a dialog of the available COM ports on your computer The first time you transfer to an instrument you will need to pick the Instruments button and register the instrument from the list Select the Port Settings button to make sure that the communication settings match the instrument Downloading GeoCom 1 To download a file with GeoCom make sure that the instrument is ON and connected to the computer by serial cable The instrument also needs to be in GeoCom mode 2 Select Download in the CSD dialog 3 In the GeoCom program open the computer COM port that the instrument is connected to by picking the Then open the Memory Card and GSI folders 4 Select the file to transfer and click the OK button Uploading GeoCom 1 To upload a file with GeoCom specify the file name to be created on the instrument in the Leica File field 2 Select the Upload button in the CSD dialog CSD will prompt for the range of points to transfer 3 Fill out the range and select the Start Transfer button 4 The GeoCom program will start Open the computer COM port by picking the Then open the Memory Card folder and highlight the GSI folder and
44. File C Hew fe Append Revise Line and Curve Layer Specify the layer name for lines and arcs Annotations Layer Specify the layer name for the annotation text Points Layer Specify the layer name for the points Traverse by Select between entering bearings azimuth gons or point numbers The points option recalls points from the current project point database Point Format Choose between creating CSD points in the project point database at each point in the figure drawing descriptions only or having no point labels Draw Linework Specify whether or not to draw linework if this is disabled then all annotation options are disabled also Prompt for Descriptions Specify whether or not the program should prompt you for point descriptions If this is not checked then point descriptions are blank Prompt for Elevations Specify whether or not the program should prompt you for point elevations If this is not checked then point elevations are set to zero Plot Point Symbols If the Point Format is set to Descriptions Only or None this option is available It will place point symbols without creating points in the project point database Create Radius Points When checked radius points will be created for arcs Radius points are given the description RADPT Chapter 9 Deed Commands 192 Store to Raw Data RW5 File When checked data entered will also be written to a raw data RW5 file that can be opened using the Edit Pr
45. Interscience Third Edition Adjusted Observations This sections lists the adjusted horizontal distance horizontal angle and azimuth measurements In addition to the adjusted measurement the residual standard residual and the standard deviation of the adjusted measurement are displayed The residual is defined as the difference between the unadjusted measurement and the adjusted measurement The residual is one of the most useful and intuitive measures displayed in the report Large residuals in relation to the standards of the survey are indications of problems with the data The standard residual is the a priori standard error divided by the computed standard deviation of a measurement A standard residual of one 1 indicates that the adjusted measurement is consistent with the standard errors defined for the measurement One or a few measurements having high standard residuals in relation to the rest of the standard residuals may be an indication of an error in the survey When all standard residuals are consistently large an inconsistency in the a priori standard errors and the adjustment is likely In other words the standard errors defined for the project are too small in relation to the survey methods used The standard deviation of the measurement indicates a 68 probability that the adjusted measurement is within plus or minus the standard deviation of the measurement s true value This tabbed section displays the computed sideshots
46. Iotals Only Total Grand Report MS Excel Impor Export Display Spread View User Attrib Attrib Options To create a report select data from the Available list and then select the Add button This will populate the Used field with the selected data Standard window selection methods can be used when selecting the data to report Holding Edit Process Raw File 101 the ctrl key while selecting data allows for making random selections Holding the shift key while selecting data will select the first item picked last item picked and all items between With Columnar format checked on the report 1s displayed as follows Edit C scad2005 USER scadrprt tmp File Edit Settings Open Save Print Exit Fid Screen Process No Adjust Results Raw file gt C ASHOW surveyl rw5 CRD file gt C scad2005 DATA Drawingl crd Scale Factor 1 00000000 Correct for Earth Curvature OFF Starting Point 1 N 5000 000 E 5000 000 z 100 000 BackSight Point 21 N 5100 000 E 4900 000 z 100 000 BackPt OccupyPt Point HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Easting Elev 1 2 AR133 53 30 711 320 69 40 57 E 5711 176 103 262 3 AR262 54 44 457 761 89732 41 E 5776 433 106 329 100 AR200 S6 49 155 441 90 00 00 P 5742 126 105 759 105 AR282 17 53 149 271 90 17 29 5627 546 105 000 AR208 56 58 201 303 89 18 05 5705 108 108 184 AR220 44 33 299 989 88 S4 32 z 5441 530 113 296 AR247 16 53 497 091 88 52 40 i 5208 404 129 136 1 D n
47. Linework Only using Tutorial2 FLD The point plot shown above is busy but with some zooming and panning most points can be identified But what exactly are we looking at Without Field to Finish someone must sort through the maze of point data to make sense of the entities to draw With a planned Field to Finish coding system the drawing will be revealed in seconds Begin Planned Field to Finish 43 by selecting Field to Finish in the CSD pulldown menu You will be confronted with a dialog asking if you wish to split multiple codes The normal answer is Yes When you code a line EP END the END might indicate the End of the polyline If you code EP MH that might actually be two codes edge of pavement and manhole at the same point Only if your codes actually have spaces in them will you want to not split the codes and consider the full text one description It is far easier to design a coding system with no spaces in field codes and to always answer split multiple codes as shown here Possible Multiple Codes Found Multiple codes may have been found ona single point This brings you to the Field to Finish table The table can be organized into headings If you scroll down you can BRK ST 6 Split all multiple codes C Split ho multiple cades C Split this one for now CO Dont split this one find the Fences and Walls portion shown below Field to Finish DATA D Land projecte 20044 Eogo0 Ponts mdb CODE C
48. Northing Easting Elev No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR268 5326 89 4050 711 34 5 32 6 00 5038 44 5710 29 103 29 P2 3 AR262 5434 89 3236 457 76 5 6 00 4587 91 5791 26 106 36 P3 4 AR208 5704 89 1803 201 30 5 40 6 00 4397 31 5726 52 108 22 P4 5 AR247 1657 88 5235 497 09 5 6 00 4363 03 5230 69 117 37 P5 19 AR289 3456 91 4405 112 47 5 6 00 4471 28 5260 97 113 36 SS1 6 AR277 4839 90 2926 223 99 5 40 6 00 4586 50 5245 75 114 85 P6 7 AR92 4130 90 2746 233 88 5 6 00 4613 16 5013 42 112 36 P7 8 AR261 2758 91 4405 387 27 5 6 00 5000 00 5000 00 100 06 CLOSE Shown above is the resulting process report The angle balance had an error of 39 seconds which was divided among the 7 traverse sides The Compass Closure shows how each traverse point was adjusted and then the resulting adjusted angles and distances Edit Process Raw File 121 Here 1s another layout of the last example that shows an external backsight setup In this case there are two known points Point 1 is the starting point and point 21 1s the initial backsight The setup could also use a backsight azimuth ie north azimuth for example instead of a backsight point number 2 Bl 29 48 x 100 00 Close Pel as 100 06 EU m 3 K 106 36 The closing record setup has changed from the last example In this example the shot from 7 to 8 1s the closing shot with point 8 as the closing point The closing reference point is still point 1 The angle balance shot is from 8
49. Point d Elevation Note Traverse Name GPS Reference Azimuth Control Standard Error Setup Standard Error Measurement Standard Error Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 96 Traverse Adds a traverse record TR to the spreadsheet editor The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the file If so you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row SideShot Adds a sideshot record SS to the spreadsheet editor The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the file If so you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row Backsight Adds a backsight BK to the spreadsheet editor The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the file If so you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row Instrument Height Adds an instrument height HI record to the editor This record contains both the instrument and rod height setting Point Adds a point PT record to the editor Provides options to either add a Blank Point Record or Import From Coordinate File d Blank Point Record Import From Coordinate File Point Inserting a blank record allows for manual input to define the coordinates for the point Import From Coordinate File imports the coordinate values from an existing point or range of poi
50. Pts Unit Symbol Text Size 0 100 Symbol Size Entity Type Connection Order C2 3D Polyline Sequential O 3D and 20 C2 20 Polyline C2 Line Oper Close 5 Points Only Random Rotate Distinct Point Layer C Distinct Symbol Layer DEN Hard Breakline Nearest Found Tie Smooth Polyline For this exercise use symbol SPTS the triangle for the traverse point TP and symbol SPTS an open circle for the fence post FP Use of the Default Code This defines everything except the Default code Whatever layer and symbol is used for the default code will be applied to all descriptions not found in the code table For this exercise choose no symbol at all for the extra codes by selecting the blank symbol SPTO Change the layer for default entities to Existing Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 29 Field to Finish DAT A C Land projects 004 LE andfil CagasPoints mdb CODE C sktop 004 5urveydesktop DatarLarndhll Ad CODE FULL NAHE DESC SYMBOL LINETYPE ENTITY TIE LAYER OH OFF DEFAULT BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER dashed Point 3DPline Point Point 3DPline 3DPline 3DPline 2DPline Existing Utility 17 TP Fence 18 Top fBan Taop fBan Road Code Definitions Paints Trees Map Symbols LOT Drawing Lines and Symbols The purpose of Field to Finish is to draw lines and symbols that wouldn t draw if you simply plotted the points to the
51. ST CE Lr SC ST FORI FORD EE SE EC EE EL TES Y iem 7 NOTE While ST was used to start polylines the classic RECT was used to close rectangles and CLS was used to close polylines in general To make these instructions work 1 e to adapt to this coding system select Code Table Settings within Field to Finish This brings up this translation table where you can substitute the special codes you wish to use Code Table Settings Code File C Program Files Land Desktop 2004 SurveyDesktopiDATANTWT fid Import LDT Desc Keys E agle Pomt Codes Process SurvCADD Coding Process Eagle Point Coding Process CAICE Coding Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix as Points Only Max Delta Height for Linework C Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only Special Codes Max Lenath for Linework For Character For Character For Character For NE Code No Elevation For OH Code Offset Horiz For JOG code For SZ Code Symbol Size For ROT Code Rotate For CLO Code Close For AZ Code 4zimuth For PC Code Start Curve For Character For _ Character Underscore For OV Code Offset Vertical For JPN Code Join to Point Name For SMO Code Smooth PCI ILI oj ons For RECT Code Close Rectangular For DIST Code Distance For PT Code End Curve For 7 Code End Linework For Multi Point 3RD Code on Di O i D e Silo T o o ce e Kak For
52. Use Last Average or Use First Use last uses the last measurement to calculate the position of the point Average uses the average of all the measurements for the position calculation and Use Last takes the last measurement to the point as the data to use Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 98 Use Backsight Reciprocals The Backsight Reciprocal options treat reciprocal measurements special A foresight to point 15 from a setup on 14 followed by a backsight from 15 to 14 makes a pair of reciprocal measurements The backsight reciprocal measurement can be ignored for its impact on recalculating the occupied point None Option or the elevation of component of the reciprocal measurements can be averaged Average Elevation option or both the elevation and distance can be averaged Average Elev amp Dist to recalculate the setup occupied point coordinates Calculate Elevations This option determines whether the elevations of the points will be calculated and written to the coordinate file Options of whether to calculate All elevations or just the Sideshots Only are provided Direct Reverse Vertical Angles Specify whether to balance all or process the direct reverse shots and use only the foresight direct shot Report Angle Format Specifies the angle format for the report The By File option makes the report use the angle format in the raw data RWS file Calculate Elevations This option controls which point elevations will be calc
53. acts as an identifier for the group of records that make up a traverse All the records after the NAME record belong to that traverse up to the next NAME record or the end of the file This record allows you to have multiple traverses in one raw file When running one of the Process commands the program will bring up a list of all the traverse names Simply choose which traverse to process If you have only one traverse in the raw file then you don t need the NAME record GPS This record contains the Latitude and Longitude of a point as measured by GPS surveying equipment using Carlson SurvCE data collection software This record has additional information tied to it such as localization files geoid files coordinate projection systems etc This record has its own processing routine in the Process pulldown within the editor Processing procedures are discussed in the Process Compute Pts pulldown documentation Raw Data Editor Pulldown Menus File Menu Fie Open Save Save As Print Import Export Open Settings Print Settings Exit Save This saves the rw5 file If the file hasn t been named you will be prompted for the file name and the location to save the file After you preform the first save this command acts as a quick save and saves the file to the name and location specified during the initial saving of the file Save As This command saves the file and always prompts for file name and location
54. adjustment of the network converges this tabbed section displays a list of the final adjusted coordinates and the computed standard X Y standard error The X Y standard error signifies that there is a 68 probability that the adjusted X Y 1s within plus or minus the standard error of the X Y of its true value This section displays the error ellipses for the adjusted coordinates The error ellipse is a truer representation of the error of the point than the X Y standard error The error ellipses are calculated to a 95 confidence interval The error ellipse axis is larger than the X Y standard errors because the error ellipses in this report are calculated at a 95 probability level The maximum error axis direction is along the axis of the semi major axis The direction of the minimum error axis direction is along the semi minor axis and is perpendicular to the semi major axis If a point is located from a variety of stations SurvNET 135 you will see the error ellipse approach a circle which is the strongest geometric shape The following four buttons are located at the bottom of the Network Least Squares Results dialog box Report This report information will be shown in a Standard Report Viewer so that you can analyze the data Select the Printer icon if you want a hard copy The first section of the report displays the primary settings used when the project was adjusted The second section of the report displays warning and error messages ge
55. and azimuth standard errors used in the adjustment Azimuths can only be defined as a direction record in the raw data file This section also shows the distances and distance standard errors used in the adjustment Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 134 These distances are horizontal distances derived from all slope distance and vertical angles for that line including all foresight and backsight distances The standard error settings used to calculate the final distance standard error include the distance standard error the PPM standard error the target centering standard error and the instrument centering standard errors The techniques and formulas used to calculate the final distance standard error are found in section 6 12 of the textbook Adjustment Computations Statistics and Least Squares in Surveying and GIS by Paul Wolf and Charles Ghilani You also will see the angles and angle standard errors used in the adjustment These angles are the averaged angle value for all the multiple angles collected The standard error settings used to calculate the final angle standard error include the pointing standard error the reading standard error the target centering standard error and the instrument centering standard errors For the techniques and formulas used to calculate the final angle standard error please reference section 6 2 of Wolf P R and Ghilani C D 1997 Adjustment Computations Statistics and Least Squares in Surveying and GIS
56. and creates an inverse report such as radial stakeout for each pair of points It includes a routine to find the best point to hold and the best point to rotate to This command provides tools for the correlation of surveyed points with that of deed input points Different points can be specified as hold points or rotation points and provide a report showing the bearing and distance of all sides of the traverse deed based upon the hold and rotation points This allows for the review of different scenarios based upon hold and rotation points Perhaps two points in the field are in good shape and seem to meet all the descriptions thereof You decide to hold these two points as good but you would like to see what holding these points will do to each side call of the tract description This is what this routine is designed to do In addition to allowing user specified trials of different hold and rotation points the routine also provides a Find Mininum Rotatation option that will report which points specified as the hold and rotation points will result in the minimum rotation of all sides of the tract description All points must be contained in the same coordinate file and the points to be used in the correlation must be specified as either Survey points or Deed points Deed Correlation 195 Deed Correlation SURUEY POINT DEED POINT 6 f 8 3 Inverse Report Check Rotate Find Min Rotate Save Edit This button allows for editing of the
57. and have a separate raw file with a second days work you can use this routine to add the second raw data to the first raw file Draw Traverse Sideshot Lines This routine draws lines for all the traverse and sideshot records Sideshot Traverses are traverses that do not lead to the closing or ending point There are different layers so that the lines can be drawn with different colors This command does not process the raw file Instead 1t reads the raw file and for each traverse and sideshot record the program looks up the coordinates for the occupied and foresight points in the CRD file So 1t may be necessary to run Process gt No Adjust before running this routine With the Erase Previous Traverse Sideshot Lines toggled on any previous linework drawn using this method will be erased from the drawing screen before drawing the lines again Draw Options Traverse Layer oldeshot Traverse Layer cideshat Layer Erase Previous Traverse Sideshot Lines Cancel Renumber Points This routine renumbers points in the raw file This applies to all point numbers including TR SS and PT records Renumber Points Range of Points to Henumber 1 13 x Line Number To Begin Henumbering Line Number To End Renumberng Number to Add to Point Numbers Cancel Range of Points to Renumber Enter in the range of points to change ie 1 4 Line Number to Begin Renumbering This corresponds to the line number located at the far left or the raw
58. applies only to the first method The main Field to Finish dialog box shown below allows you to load the data and code files view and edit the code definitions and then process the files Chapter 5 Field to Finish 148 Field to Finish DATA C sktop 004 arlsonsureeysD atas Dravingl crd CODE C esktop 2004 Carlsonsurvey D atas Ceure fld CODE FULL MAME DESC SYMBOL LINETYPE ENTITY TIE LAYER ON OFF gt SET CONTROL lt HUB amp TACK HET SET spt8 continuous Line TRAVERSE IRON PIN IP SET spt5 continuous Line TRAVERSE HONUMENT S HON SET spti13 continuous Line TRAVERSE CONCRETE H CONCRET SPT6 CONTINUOUS Point MONUMENT PK MAIL SE PK SET spt3 continuous Line TRAVERSE START START sptu6 BYLAVER Point CONTROL STAKE STK 5pt31 continuous Line TRAVERSE Road Sequence CROSS CUT amp CUT spti6 EYLAYER Point CONTROL HOUHHEHTS lt Report Codes Points Code Table by CAD CSD points in the drawing have point attributes including a description When Field to Finish draws the points the point description from the data file 1s processed to match a code The code then defines the description drawn with the point e g consider a code of UP with a description of POLE and a data point with the description UP The data point description UP would be matched with the code UP and the point would end up being drawn with the description POLE A special character the divide key can be used for an unprocessed descriptio
59. arc by default the jog special code following any normal user defined code enables the entry of left and right jogs or segments of a polyline This is useful for drawing buildings based on tape measurements as opposed to trying to physically survey each building corner by total station or GPS The key is to take 2 measurements on a building which establishes a line or vector Assuming you used bld for building the second bld would be followed by the reserved word jog which in turn would be followed by the left and right measurements in the form of bld jog 10 20 10 40 20 The or negative sign indicates a left hand jog All jogs are at right angles to the previous segment With CSD the JOG option no longer creates duplicate points for each jog segment The additional segments are drawn with no associated point numbers minimizing point file size En 220 10 40 20 NR add bl a Jogo we NS a P di AT Straight JOG within JOG command It is possible to add a straight jog instead of the conventional right and left jogs This is done by using the Ss option i e S10 for 10 units which must follow the JOG expression You cannot use S10 as a reserved understood command unless it follows JOG Use this straight jog option when there is a need to extend the vector of the first two building points surveyed If you cannot obtain a shot at the true second building corner take two shots where you can obtain
60. as Points Only Max Delta Height for Linework Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only Max Length for Linework Special Codes For Character For Character For Character For NE Code No Elevation For OH Code Offset Horiz For JOG code For SZ Code Symbol Size For ROT Code Rotate For CLO Code Close For amp Zl Code Azimuth For PC Code Start Curve For Character For _ Character Underscore For OV Code Offset Vertical For JPN Code Join to Point Name For SMO Code Smooth ARAROL oj ons For RECT Code Close Rectangular For DIST Code Distance For PT Code End Curve For 7 Code End Linework For Multi Point 3RD Code Cancel Help eiie TH O i D ex llo Ew Tia m x lt g E Sa e IPIE For 7 Code Start Linework For Multi Point 2ND Code c mu c Special Codes This section allows you to specify your own code for commands such as start curve end curve and offsets See Special Codes below e Sort Table Sorts the code table by either code name or layer Report Codes Points Opens the dialog box shown below and prints the code table or the data file to the screen file or printer A useful option is to print the data file and choose Sort by Codes grouping the data points by distinct codes Report Codes Points Report Type Code Definitions C Data Points Code Definition Options Category Match F Use Report Formatter
61. attributes are in the PNTMARK PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC layers The points are also in an overall layer as specified in this dialog box This layer setup allows you to freeze a group of points by the main layer name or freeze point attributes for all the points in the drawing e g freezing layer PNTS would freeze all the points in this layer Freezing layer PNTELEV would freeze the point elevation attribute for all the points Draw Range Draws existing points from the current coordinate file The Draw Range button will prompt for the point numbers to draw Draw All Draws all the points in the coordinate file then zooms the extent of the display to show the points Enter amp Assign This command can be used to create new points using the point northing and easting Screen Pick Point Allows you to create points by picking the point coordinate on the screen e g set the Object Snap to EndPoint and pick the end point of a building polyline to create a point at the building corner Prompts To create a new point 1 In the Draw Locate Point dialog box choose Screen Pick 2 Pick point to create 3 Select lt Enter Point Elevation lt 0 00 gt Enter elevation or Press S and enter to select text to set elevation 4 Enter lt Select text of elevation gt Select text entity that defines elevation of point These prompts appear only if elevation prompting is turned on 5 Enter point description HUB This prompt only
62. below with the drawing name Land1 dwg or Tutoriall dwg The exact names are not critical but may help you to follow along closely New Drawing Project Based Drawing Hame Mame Tutarial1 dwg Project and Drawing Location Project Path C Land Projects 20041 v Project Name Tutorial hal Drawing Path C Land Projects 200447 utarialT sdiig v Filter Praject List Project Details Create Project Select Drawing template Preview acad Hamed Plat Styles dwat acad dwt acadl 50 Named Plot Styles dwt acadizo dwat IE ANSI A portrait Color Dependent Plot 3 BEER ki oa ol a il dua 4 Show sub folders A scale of 1 50 imperial or English is appropriate for this data set Importing Tutoriall txt After the project and drawing are started select Import Export Points under the Points menu of Autodesk Land Desktop From the Import Export Points fly out select Import Points Complete the dialog shown below E Format Manager Import Points Format PNEZD comma delimited v is pee p Eras Source File sure Desktop Data tutorial bet c Cancel Add Points to Point Group Help dl Advanced Select OK and then select OK again to the default settings in the COGO Database Import Options Screen The points are then read in added to the Points mdb file and plotted on the screen TIP For greater contrast change the color of the point numbers to black by selecting t
63. converted to classsic FBK format for use in other features Chapter 3 Data Collectors 60 Data Collectors Data Collector Description curvicE Fasts2urvey GZ For Carlson Sorfware data collection programs and curvi E and Survotar Also works wath Soklaa G2 and Thales Fastsurvey CG Field For the Cas data collector program TDs Tripod Data For data collectors that use TDS software Ranger owvstems HP4s5 HP95 Husky Eo 2 amp Eo 3 Corvallis MC V and TOPCON Foa FOSS and POd8 S MI For SIMI data collectors on the HF4s Leica For Leica GIF 10 module and Leica instruments SDE through SDE 33 and other collectors that have a SLE format lke the Trimble S okkiaS DE Micon For Hikon DTM and DE 48 total stations Geodimeter For the Geodimeter eodat collector Suveyors Assistant For data collectors running Surveyors Assistant sottware Corvallis Moz MC and Pentax 565 Topcon Supports these Topcon models 01020 GP T2000 SurvCE FastSurvey G2 NOTE Unless otherwise indicated the term SurvCE will apply to Carlson SurvCE SurvStar Thales FastSurvey and Sokkia G2 in this section First connect the serial cable Then select Data Transfer on the hand held Choose SurvCADD Carlson Survey Download This leads to a File Transfer screen on SurvCE which says Awaiting Connection SurvCE is ready Now all the action 1s on the PC side In the Survey Menu choose Data Collection gt SurvCE This brings up the Carlson SurvCE transf
64. coordinates of the starting and the ending points must be known The routine begins with a dialog for specifying the reference closing coordinates and any scale factors to apply to the distance measurements The Reference Closing Point is the last point in the traverse whose coordinates must be known If an angle balance shot is used in the traverse the Reference Angle Balance Angle must also be specified either as a value or as the angle between known points Since angles and distances have errors of different magnitudes they are normalized using weights based on the accuracy and confidence with which these quantities have been measured There is a dialog for specifying the estimated measurement errors The Reading Error is the horizontal angular error in the instrument For example for a 5 second instrument this error would be 5 The Pointing Error accounts for several factors in the horizontal angle reading including accuracy lining up the crosshairs on the target the target size and the optical quality of the instrument The Target and Instrument Centering Errors are the distance off the point due to faulty centering The EDM Constant Error is the accuracy of the instrument distance measurements The EDM Scaler Error is entered in parts per million for the increased error in longer measurements These settings can be saved and loaded as a way to store settings for different equipment Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 108 Measurement Error
65. data editor Enter the line number to begin the renumbering Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 116 Line Number To End Renumbering This also corresponds to the line number located at the far left on the raw data editor Enter the line number to end the renumbering If the range of numbers specified does not occur between the beginning line number and the ending line number no changes will be made Numbers to Add to Point Numbers Enter in the value to add This number will be added to the existing point number to create the new point number For example if the number to add is 10 and the existing point numbers 1 and 6 the new renumber points will be 11 and 16 Coordinate File This option allows for editing and or listing of the coordinate data in the active coordinate file The active coordinate file will be displayed in the Header of the raw data editor Edit Point will bring up the edit point dialog and allows editing of the points one at a time Edit Assign Point Point Number North Co East Elevation 2 Description Motes DE S The List Point option will list the points in the active coordinate file in the standard report viewer format Set Coordinate Fileprovides an option to set a new coordinate file to process to This may be useful when processing the raw file by different adjustment methods for later review and comparison Point Groups This option can be used to organize the survey data into point groups There are t
66. densify 2 Select objects select polylines 3 Point interval lt 10 0 gt Press Enter 4 Testing Entity gt 1 5 Added 17 points to 1 polyline Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command densepl File Name sp poly3d arx Set Polyline Origin Function This command sets the starting vertex of a closed polyline Select the polyline then pick near the point you want to set as the starting point Prompts 1 Select Polyline pick a polyline 2 Pick Near New Origin Point pick a point on the polyline to be the starting point Prerequisite A closed polyline Keyboard Command PLCHGORG Remove Polyline Arcs Function This command allows you to replace arc segments in polylines with chords Removing arcs is a prerequisite to some commands that don t handle arcs such as Break by Closed Polyline and Make 3D Grid file This command can add many vertices to the polyline Prompts Set Polyline Origin 299 1 Select polylines to remove arcs from 2 Select objects pick polylines 3 Offset cutoff lt 0 5 gt Press Enter This specifies the maximum distance that any point on the arc will be allowed to shift Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command RMARC Remove Polyline Segment Function This command allows you to remove a specified segment from a polyline e A polyline segment is the section between two vertices of the polyline e There are two options for removing the segment When you specify the Conti
67. drawing based on a field survey Field to Finish features draw not only points and coordinate data but also add symbols and linework to designated layers and even change text styles according to instructions built into the Field to Finish coding Autodesk Land Desktop conducts Field to Finish using the raw survey data file which 1s known as the Fieldbook fbk file Carlson Survey Desktop CSD performs Field to Finish using the point file typically named points mdb within Autodesk Land Desktop The use of Field to Finish by surveying engineering construction and mining companies places additional demands on survey crews to do intelligent coding and on the office team to design an effective coding system Field to Finish is used by 30 of survey crews depending on software and geographic region Field to Finish remains the single greatest software based method for increasing efficiency and speed of work of the combined field and office team The ease of Field to Finish with CSD encourages increasingly more companies to utilize these benefits There are two approaches to Field to Finish reactive and planned Tutorial 1 focuses on reactive Field to Finish This makes no demands on the field crew to carefully code their survey points This method can be used to get linework and symbols drawn from surveys conducted by outside firms over which you may have no influence on coding and from in house survey crews who don t follow any particular c
68. entered or edited the graphics window will be updated to show the configuration or new configura tion of the traverse The option of whether to show sideshots is also available When a cell 1s selected the traverse or sideshot line in the display window will change to the color yellow for a graphical reference The graphics window is toggled on or off from the Display Graphics Window menu inside the raw file editor Vertical Distance Eoo Spreadsheet Colors of Hide Row 4 Show SideShots Show Row V Zoom Mode Hide Description Records Pan Mode Show Description Records Pick Mode Hide Record Headers Resize Text Es Show Record Headers Fixed Text Size Graphics gt On Turns the graphics window on Graphics gt Off Turns the graphics window off Graphics gt Show Sideshots Controls the display of the sideshot data in the graphics window Figure 1 shows the graphics window with sideshots on Figure 1A shows the graphics window with sideshots off Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 90 Northing 5000 0000 5100 0000 Ba Pt Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C Scad2005 Data Drawineg1 Fle Edit Display Add Process Compute Pts Tools as Easting 3000 0000 4900 0000 Ari OX Elevation Desc 100 0000 START 100 0000 SetAzi 21 0 0000 RodHt 6 000 Fa Prt Code HorzAngle AR y 133 5330 SlopeDist enith ng Desc 711 320 89 4057 IPF Disturbed Figure 1 Sideshots On Edit Proces
69. image zoom or pan mode is selected by a toggle Once the satisfactory offsets are calculated they are inserted into the drawing by clicking on Finish2D button The Finish 3D button opens the Elevate 2D Polylines command Offsets amp Intersections 221 If it is preferable to handle intersections manually you may run the command multiple times on non intersecting centerlines Another alternative is to use the Offset command and the Fillet command Offsets and Intersections Beets UE AAS YARS ioj x Calculate Finish 2D Finish 3D Cancel Help addi Mouse Drag Action Zoom Pan Smooth Interior Corners Exterior Corners Primary Roads Secondary Roads Description Layer Draw Offset Radius Offset Radius EOP Pick M f120 43 0 12 0 43 0 ROW Pick Iv 30 0 25 0 30 0 25 0 OO O T wmxl T T T T p JD P eee 1 Dm Jjb O ig 3 Jd 1 1 1 JJ gj Jg Y 08m D Jmm BJ p n Prompts Select all PRIMARY road polylines Select objects select polylines Select objects Enter Select all SECONDARY road polylines Select objects select polylines Select objects Enter Calculating offsets for layer EOP Calculating offsets for layer ROW Keyboard Command wayint Prerequisite Centerline polylines Cul de sacs Function This command uses a polyline centerline and the offset polylines to create a cul de sac These offset polylines can be generated by the Offsets
70. matched with the field data descriptions Layer The point and line work for the code will be created in this layer Full Name This is an optional field that describes the code for viewing Description This value is assigned to the point description field An additional description can be added to a point by entering it after a forward slash in the data description field Use Code Turns off the Description field described above Instead the points will be drawn with their original unprocessed descriptions Linetype Line work can be drawn in any of the special linetypes or with the linetype for the layer BYLAYER The spacing and size of the special line types is determined by the AutoCAD LTSCALE system variable and by the line type settings from the Annotate Defaults command The special line type Hedge is drawn with a user specified width The special line type Userdash is drawn with user specified distances for the length of the dash and the length of the gap between dashes You will be prompted for this information when you select that line type CSD also offers continuous linetypes to Field to Finish When you select Linetype or Set Linetype in the Edit options you can choose among the individual entity linetypes first group of selections and the true continuous linetypes second part of the selections The difference in these linetypes is illustrated by the Copy command A fence line made up of individual entities whe
71. mdb CODE C sktop 004 5urvepdesktop DatarLarndhll Ad CODE FULL NAHE DESC SYHBOL LINETYPE ENTITY TIE LAYER ON OFF TRAU PT TRRU PT BYLAVER HUCOR HWCOR BYLAVER NUCOR WS IDES WS IDE H BYLAVER WSIDES6A On BYLAVER BYLAVER BYLAVER BYLAVER BYLAVER BYLAVER BYLAVER DATA Land projects 004 LandhillEogo Ponts mdb CODE C sktop 004 5urvepdesktop DatarLarndhll Ad CODE FULL NAHE DESC SYMBOL LINETYPE ENTITY TIE LAYER OH OFF BYLAVER Line Open DEFAULT On BYLAVER Point Open LP On BYLAVER 3DPline Open 17 On BYLAVER Point BYLAVER Line BYLAVER Point BYLAVER Point BYLAVER Point BYLAVER Point Code Table by Points Defining Linework Coding Select Code 17 and edit 1t into a 3DPline by choosing Edit under Code Definitions There are many options here Chapter 2 Tutorials 26 but you will note that the program has already layerized code 17 to the same layer as the description namely layer 17 You can change this to Ditch or TopofBank or BreakLine as desired but for efficiency in the processing all we need to do is make sure the entity type lower left in dialog 1s a 3D polyline This will assist in making accurate contour maps and defining break lines The default linetype will be continuous Repeat this process for code 18 Edit Field Code Definition Category Processing ON 1 Code Full Name Description Sequence Companion Codes Use Raw Description Set Linetupe
72. of the network Sideshots are filtered out of the network adjustment as part of the preprocessing process Least squares adjustment requires a lot of computer resources Sideshots are filtered out to minimize the computer resources needed in a large network adjustment The sideshots are computed from the final adjusted network points The results of the sideshot computations are the same whether they are reduced as part of the least squares adjustment or from the final adjusted coordinates Vertical This tabbed portion of the report displays the results of the vertical adjustment The horizontal and the vertical adjustments are separate least squares adjustment processes As long as there are redundant vertical measurements the vertical component of the network will be reduced and adjusted using least squares The first part of the vertical adjustment results displays the fixed vertical benchmarks used in the vertical adjustment These points are fixed and will not be adjusted vertically Next the points that will be adjusted as part of the vertical adjustment are listed The third part of the vertical adjustment report displays the measurements used The measurements consist of the vertical elevation difference between points in vertical adjustment The lengths between these points are used to determine the weights in the vertical adjustment Longer length lines are weighted less in the vertical adjustment than shorter length lines Coordinates If the
73. other formats When you select the Edit Process Raw Data File command you are prompted to specify the name of the raw data RW5 file The point database for the current project is used automatically Edit Process Raw Data File uses a spreadsheet for editing the raw data as shown Each row of the spreadsheet is represented by a number located at the far left side of the editor Various messages and reports often reference possible problems with the data by this row number Each row of the spreadsheet represents one record of data There are 14 types of data records The type of data record 1s shown in the first column Different record types use different numbers of columns Whenever the data record type changes between rows a record header is added to the spreadsheet that describes each column of data in the following row To edit the raw data simply highlight the cell and type in the new value To change the type of record pick on the down arrow in the first column and choose a new data type from the list To delete a row highlight any cell in the row and hit the Delete key or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu Records can be added pressing the Insert key pressing the down arrow key from the last line in the spreadsheet or by choosing one of the add records from the Add menu Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 80 Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C Scad2005 Data Drawing1 crd B DX Fie Edi Display Add Process Compute Pts Too
74. point from changing if measurements to the point dictate a change in coordinate position Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 114 Process Settings Direct Reverse Settings Direct Reverse Vertical Angles This option determines how to handle direct reverse vertical anglemeasurements when processing Balance Direct Reverse will take the mean of the direct reverse measurements and use this value when processing the file Direct Only will only use the direct measurement to the point forprocessing Foresight Backsight Measurements Balance Foresight Backsight allows for averaging in the Foresight and backsight measurements when using direct reverse sets The Foresight Only option will average the foresight measurements only of a direct reverse set Horizontal Angle Tolerance Seconds This is the tolerance that the angle measured by the direct measurements and the angle measured by the reverse measurements in a direct reverse set must fall within Flip Angle Tolerance Seconds User specified value for the acceptable difference in measured horizontal angles determined from the direct BD FD and reverse BR FR observations Distance Tolerance User specified tolerance for the difference in distance measurements to the same points When this value is exceeded on a measurement it will be displayed on the process results report Process Settings gt Drawing Point and Linework This option controls the drawing of points and linework using Field to Fin
75. polylines Select objects select entities Prerequisite Entities Points lines polylines etc on which to locate points Keyboard Command AUTOPNTS Building_Offset_Extensions Function This command is used to calculate building corner offsets that are extensions of the building faces The below example was for 10 offset points to be generated starting at point number 510 Starting point number This is the point number that the offsets are supposed to start Select the building object by screen picking and then press enter Enter offset amount This is the distance that the offsets are extended past the end of the building face line Prompts Starting point number lt 373 gt 510 Select building perimeter Select objects 1 found Building_Offset_Extensions 185 Select objects Enter offset amount lt 10 00 gt y PHVIAcAGarWlortNn gt yy gt Blu3XsBED t E n Select building perimeter Keyboard Command bldg pnts Prerequisite An object that represents a building Erase Points Function This command erases Autodesk Land Desktop points from the drawing The points to erase can be selected from the screen or specified by point number Erasing a Autodesk Land Desktop point will erase the point symbol and point entity Optionally the points may be erased from the coordinate file As long as the points are not deleted from the coordinate file they can be redrawn with the Draw Locate P
76. position arrowhead can be moved without drawing segments The orientation of the current position arrowhead can be changed with the Right Left and Angle commands Here is a list of the Extend by Distance options Extend by Distance 243 Key Name Action Draw Actions draw ar extend the line or mode polyline iy iov e Actions only move the pointer E T Ag A 5 mode Istance to draw or extend rotate edge selected line or polyline Tatal sets current segment to specified distance distance Angle Rotates pointer by specitied number change ot degrees m Rotates pointer ta align with segment Bearing Sets painter direction by bearing In format Gdd mmss with Gi quadrant d degrees m minutes s seconds e g 130 1005 is ME SU degrees 10 minutes and 5 seconds S everses pointer direction Moves pointer ta next point P Previous Moves painter to previous point Unda the last Extend by Distance command Closes the polyline O Open Opensthe polyline Displays this list Prompts Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 244 1 Select line or pline to extend select line or polyline Pick the polyline near the place to extend 2 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help T50 The line is extended to a total length of 50 units 3 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help R The pointer 1s turned to the right 4 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U He
77. screen Use this command to locate lot corner points along a frontage line The point symbol point layer and point prompting options are set in the dialog box shown below Interval Along Entity Symbol Mame SPT10 Select Symbol x Point Prompt Settings Prompt for Descriptions Prompt for Elevations v Locate on Real Z Axis Point Number Settings v Point Numbers v Automatic Point Numbering Starting Point Number Layer Name for Points ETR Break Entity At Points v Create Points At Endpoints Horizontal Distance Between Points Distance On Line Segments Distance On Curve Segments Prompts Chapter 7 Point Commands 182 1 In the Interval Along Entity dialog box you must set parameters for the point Symbol Name Displays the symbol name Select Symbol Allows you to select a new symbol type The symbol is displayed to the right 2 Under Point Prompt Settings determine the point attributes and elevation Prompt for Descriptions You are prompted for point description Prompt for Elevations You are prompted for elevation Locate on Real Z Axis Uses the elevation of the selected entity 3 Under Point Number Settings determine how the created points are numbered Point Numbers Assigns point numbers to the created points Automatic Point Numbering Numbers the new points automatically You will be prompted for point numbers if t
78. set to word length of eight 8 and one 1 stop bit under the communication settings Print File The Receive Sokkia Print File function downloads a print report from the SDR33 data collector This file is only used for printing report purposes in CSD This file is not used by CSD to generate coordinate files or raw files 1 The first step is to choose Data format Printed in the Communications menu of the SDR33 2 Choose the Receive Print File button in CSD 3 On the SDR33 choose the Send function and select a job to send At this point the file is transferred 4 After downloading the job report is displayed in the CSD standard report viewer Nikon Download 1 Choose the equipment and data type under the Transfer Type list Check that the communication and data format settings match your collector 2 Select the Download button and follow the on screen directions Upload 1 Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 2 Select the Upload button Specify the range of point numbers to upload 3 Set the points and then click the Start Transfer button Convert The Convert button will translate the Nikon raw file format TRN or RAW into CSD coordinate and raw RW5 files Chapter 3 Data Collectors 72 Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data throug
79. the point and symbol attributes With None the point layers are the standard layers PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC and the symbol layer is PNTMARK With Points or Both the point attribute layers begin with the layer for the code followed by the attribute type In other words a DWL code with the layer name DRIVEWAY would have the point attributes DRIVE WAY NO DRIVEWAYELEV and DRIVEWAY DESC With Symbols or Both the symbol attribute layer begins with the layer for the code followed by MARK Smooth Polyline This applies a modified bezier smoothing to the polyline The smoothed polyline will pass through all the original points Connection Order The points of a distinct code can be connected in their point number order or by nearest found which makes the line by adding the next closest point Tie When checked the linework drawn with this code will always close For example if you have points 1 2 3 and 4 with the code BLDG Tie is on for the code BLDG then the linework will be drawn from point to 2 to 3 to 4 and then back to point 1 closing the figure Precision Controls the display precision for the elevation label Attribute Layout ID Controls the location of the point number elevation and description These at tribute layouts are defined in AutoCAD drawings that are stored in the CSD SUP directory with the file name of SRVPNO plus the ID number 1 e SRVPNOI DWG SRVPNO2 DWG etc If you want to change the attribute positions for a
80. the program will locate points along the centerline at the intersection points of selected lines with that of the centerline This routine is to be used along with Locate Points on Centerline This is a good option to use when the exact station of where the offset points are to be created is not known but is referenced by an existing line on the drawing Use Centerline from to specify whether to define the centerline by picking a polyline in the drawing selecting a centerline CL file or using 2 points Use Reference Elevation to assign elevations to the points created when locating points on the centerline of offset points When using a 3D Polyline for the elevation reference points will be created at the station entered and the offsets specified with the elevation of the same station along the 3D polyline The Profile option will do the same as the 3D Polyline option only it will use a profile file for the elevation reference You will be prompted for the profile to use for the elevation reference None simply creates 2d point data on elevation zero The Reference Elevation option is good for creating points along the centerline for final grade elevation points Profile to 3D polyline can be used to transfer the profile data to the polyline before calculating the final grade points The Manual Entry option in Input Station Offset from will prompt for the station and offset distances The Read File option will read the stations and offsets from a te
81. them measure the additional distance to the true corner and record it as a straight jog Here is a graphic example Field to Finish 159 c2 blo Jog s4010 2050 10 50 O d t e JPN The JPN Join to Point Name special code joins to the point named immediately after the code e g JPN205 draws a line from the current point to the point 205 RECT Causes a rectangle to be formed on a 2D or 3D polyline using one of two different methods If a number follows RECT e g RECTIO a rectangle will be drawn 10 units to the right of the last two points ending on the point with the RECT code Use a negative offset to place the rectangle on the left side e g RECT 2 5 If no number follows RECT the polyline will be closed by shooting right angles from the first point of the polyline and the current point and creating a new point where those two lines cross 0 00 i bold rect 40 NOTE You may substitute your own code for any of these special codes in the Code Definition Set tings dialog shown Field to Finish will layer the points and linework according to these code definitions If the layers are not already defined Field to Finish will create the necessary layers and assign different colors Sequences Sequences are a way to simplify field entry of a sequence of codes For example a road cross section might Chapter 5 Field to Finish 160 be entered as SHD1 EPI CL EP2 SHD2 Instead of entering these descriptions in
82. this instance it 1s possible to obtain only a point file but that is often enough to get a drawing started with decent linework and symbol plotting Report Codes Points in the main Field to Finish dialog helps you analyze the source coordinate files prior to Field to Finish processing Click on Data Points and Sort by Codes as shown below Report Codes Points Report Type O Code Definitions 2 Data Points Code Definition Options Data Point Options E Use Report Farmatter Highest point number 356 Use Leica Format Point range 1 356 Field Code Match This leads to a report that helps you quickly identify the range of descriptions and how many coordinate points are associated with each description found Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 37 Carlson Survey Desktop Edit C Program Files Land Desktop 20 Sele File Edit Settings oe de Open Save Print Exit 01 14 2004 21 53 A Points from C XLand Projects 04XLandfill cogoXpoints mdb Job number 0 000 Job Date 0 0000 Job description Highest point number 356 blank HOT DEFIHED 1 17 10 16 18 21 23 50 127 158 17 HOT DEFIHED 51 18 33 126 172 176 22 DEF LHED gt 32 DEFIHED 161 177 284 286 356 7 68 DEFIHED 5 162 168 169 171 17 TRAY PT 150 lt HOT DEFIHED 2 NSIDE40X60 lt HOT DEFIHED 6 NOTE This report is presented in a standard Carlson Survey Desktop report screen that allows full editing and lets you plot to the
83. this point press F4 on the Topcon for STOP and review the points within the Topcon screen to verify that they are there Then you are ready to stakeout with the points using the onboard features of the Topcon instrument Downloading Download Procedure Topcon to PC Follow the same steps outlined above and obtain the following screen using the function keys on the Topcon instrument e Fl SEND DATA e F2 LOAD DATA e F3 COMM PARAMETERS Select SEND DATA and answer the questions up until the only remaining option is OK to begin the download This gets the Topcon side poised and ready On the PC choose Download Receive Topcon File as shown in the dialog box above Note that you do not need to fill out any of the 3 top dialog boxes in the download screen The program will default to the job name on the Topcon instrument and will prompt you if you wish to change the name After clicking Download on the PC side it will say WAITING Back on the Topcon instrument press OK to start the download The points will download into the PC and when completed the Topcon instrument will typically beep At this point exit the download dialog and return to the main menu on the PC Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Pr
84. to 9 and the reference angle is from to 21 juo Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 122 Example of an open traverse The traverse starts from the known point 1 and ends at the known point 14 In this case there is no angle balance shot The closing shot 1s from 3 to 4 with point 4 being the closing point Point 14 is the closing reference point The closing record setup has changed from the last example In this example the shot from 7 to 8 is the closing shot with point 8 as the closing point The closing reference point 1s still point 1 The angle balance shot is from 8 to 9 and the reference angle is from to 21 Here 1s an example of an open traverse Compass Report from Open Traverse example Process Results Raw file gt d scdev data tsurvey rw5 Compass Closure Adjusted Point Comparison Original Adjusted Point Northing Easting Northing Easting Distance Bearing 2 5013 76 5711 18 5013 78 5711 13 0 047 N 63d21 19 W 3 4560 69 5776 42 4560 72 5776 35 0 078 N 63d21 19 W 4 4372 46 5705 08 4372 50 5705 00 0 091 N 63d21 19 W Point Horizontal Vertical Slope Inst Rod Northing Easting Elev No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR133 5324 89 4050 711 27 5 32 6 00 5013 78 5711 13 103 29 3 AR262 5506 89 3236 457 74 5 43 6 00 4560 72 5776 35 106 36 4 AR208 5712 89 1803 201 30 5 40 6 00 4372 50 5705 00 108 22 The traverse starts from the known point 1 and ends at the known point 14 In this case there is no angle bala
85. to Finish from Coordinate Data 23 Landfill C M and Projects 20044 andfillutwgM and1 dwg s LinesfCurves Alignments Parcels Labels Terrain Inquiry Utilities sg Help TAE Si et Gare e 9 Eu g Bo Data Collectors Edit Frocess Raw Data File dE 3 Bylayer v Field to Finish Ta Draw Locate Points oth zija m Erase Points x p xf i COGO a 090 oe ro ales Locate ak Intersect Interpolate Points Create Points From Entities Convert Points Insert Symbols Edit Symbol Library Enter Deed Description Process Deed File Legal Description Palyline Tools k Area Label Station OFFset Calculate Offsets Cut Sheet Configure Carlson Survey Desktop Carlson Survey Desktop Help About Carlson Survey Desktop The first time you select Field to Finish it displays a dialog to load an existing Field to Finish code table Load Csurvey fld to get started The Possible Multiple Codes Found dialog box may appear If this dialog box is displayed select the default Split all multiple codes and press ok Field to Finish DATA C Land projects 2004 Landhl Cogo Points mdb CODE C esktop 2004S urveydesktop4D atar Courvey ld CODE FULL HAHE DESC S YHBOL LIHETVPE ENTITY TIE LAYER OH OFF SET CONTROL lt HUB amp TACK H amp T SET spts continuous TRAVERSE IRON PIN IP SET spt5 continuous TRAVERSE MONUMENT HON SET spti3 continuous TRAVERSE CONCRETE H CONCRET SPT6 CONTINUOUS MONUMENT PK
86. to blue in Layer Control is crossed in the NW corner by a wayward red Layer 17 polyline In this instance one polyline connected arbitrarily to what should have been a distinct new polyline This occurred because there was no start stop logic See Tutorial 2 for examples of polyline start stop curve rectangle and other techniques For reactive Field to Finish these must be cleaned up The wayward red polyline segment in the NW corner cutting across the blue polylines that represent a trapezoidal ditch can be removed by the Remove Polyline Segment command Remove Polyline Segment Select the Survey pulldown menu then Polyline Tools then Remove Polyline Segment The command line prompt iS Break polyline at removal or keep continuous lt Break gt Continuous Press B for Break or simply press Enter Any option in the lt gt brackets 1s the default response E 7 e C3 E O r H ch A xat l 44 ME Break polyline at removal or keep continuous lt break gt Continuous elect polyline segment to remove 4111 75 4747 48 000 SNAP GRID ORTHO rocas Josmar OTRACK LWT MODEL Z lt o2 222000000 When prompted to pick the segment to remove select as shown This completes the process The drawing is cleaner but there is still work to do Inverse to Determine a Distance or Find a Point If the top of bank layer is set to magenta you can see that the survey crew coded a combination of TB an
87. use 94s eSa493 xx 2559 93 493953295 226 Inverse WID Area uus mom x Rom eum Bow m3 wo 309 3 148 5 591 49 A 9 9 9 955 3 8 22 Area by Lines did AICS us eo Ro dh ooh da AAA 221 ACA by IDE HOP POE v ou we wow AE E E T9590 m S S RE NUR PLE ee Ue ew S 228 Area Dy Closed POIVIIES x oe ne se sa ie sasssa 3 108 AAA 228 PGI ATCA oe umm m4 ss S Be E DASS EE SIS BE A 220 Slide Side Afa sss ssar ar wo x39 xo 6 RO E X E A UR aedem de 3e 4 Da URL Ross 229 Ateca Radial irom A UPS ovio sasse dasad asid AA EAS 230 Chapter 14 Survey Text Commands 233 Survey lex DeIaulNs 3 4 2 1902092 names orders RA 234 CASEtDIMCASIONS x d u xo os ER Pow mom s Row Row ma NP UR wow X OP NE ox Se roS ox vo d 235 Building Dimensions a w spore raras sar 236 Adjoint Text cae ee ane een eee eee eh abe hee ds ss ES S 237 Cae Poe able sw uw aaraa as A 237 Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 239 ZD PODIO useeanceeeeeo eee ooo asadas ass aa 240 OPONI oee eeaeee ass aS awa e ea ee e 240 is IEEE IE 242 Bucend DV Distance sesse 5 Ge Gee eee oa 242 boundary POIVHBe anzsaseeeive sk Aa os oa Ge 3959 x 245 Smiak Wiap BUS eu uw ctw eee ea dra rs eee yale REOR 246 Erase by Closed Polyline xm ue uox onc om URGE AAA AA ee eee RS EOS S 247 Oset oD Pob He siaceeaeece RP AEax 54243 xA RS NIE RE PIE P 248 FPU DOPOD 222 9 4 9 499 5 9 44459359555 55 bea 29 240 En tes fO POD HS ass wow cR ow 9 3 X Fox as POR ROREM Pos mA d S Wm A 240 Text Explode To Polylines ec
88. want to add the station offset to the point descriptions use Add to Existing Point Description The Point Description option turns the station and offset ON Label Text Only Labels the offsets that are onscreen as text only Label Text draws a leader to the point with the station text above the line and the offset below 2 Label Position Sets the location The polyline should be drawn in the order of increasing stations If the polyline goes the wrong way use the Reverse Polyline command as described in this manual e Automatic Labeling is automatic e Pick Location Select the location for each label 3 Type of Curve Sets the type of curve e Roadway Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve e Railroad Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length based on 100 foot chord segments 4 Other settings in Label Station Offset Settings Used for precision and text additions Chapter 10 Station Offset Commands 206 Layer Name Enter in a layer name for the text The Select button brings up a list of layers to choose from Beginning Station Enter in the beginning station to start the labeling for Automatic Max Offset to Calc Enter in the maximum offset distance to label Points with offsets greater than the Maximum Offset to Calc are not labeled Station Decimals Determines the precision of the station for labels Offset Decimals Determines the precision of the offset labels Station Prefix Assigns a p
89. where no coding system has been developed But the real promise the real potential of Field to Finish 1s to design a coding system that 1s used by all in house field crews leading to even more complete drawings created directly from field coding The challenge here 1s to design a system of descriptions that fits your crews and fits your data collector For example if you don t have a data collector with access to the full keyboard range of letters and numbers rare these days you may prefer to design a very simple system where numbers represent descriptions like ep edge of pavement and fl fence line and codes such as are used for end line Some companies print out cards with field codes that fit in a shirt pocket for reference Other companies limit the range of codes to a list that can be memorized easily 10 to 15 descriptions Whatever system you design a planned system of Field to Finish used daily by in house survey crews leads to the greatest time saving and automation You can follow Tutorial 2 without prior practice on Tutorial 1 Tutorial 2 requires access to two files Tutorial2 FLD and Tutorial2 TXT These two files are found in your SurveyDesktop Data subdirectory as in C Program Files Land Desktop 20041 SurveyDesktop Data e Tutorial2 fld is a field code file developed by a New Jersey firm for in house use It is an example of a highly developed coding system requiring a reference card initially until committed to mem
90. 10 00 Offset gt 10 00 Right before station denotes point is ahead of line segment denotes beyond 6 Pick point or point numbers Enter to End 22 28 Station Offset Description Eley Ptr North East 4 05 89L 1548 Catch Basin 0 00 22 4811 4454 5 7843L 48 18 Power Pole O 23 4659 4548 d 77 26L 5728 Power Pole 0 24 4368 4656 9 01 55R 16 81 Catch Basin D 25 4745 4887 10 40 51 L 25 39 Traffic Sign O 27 4872 5043 4 348R 2215 LightPole 0 46 405 4454 Calculate Offsets 211 7 Pick point or point numbers Enter to End Press Enter Menu Location Tools Prerequisite A polyline that represents the centerline or a centerline file cl Keyboard Command CALCOFF Chapter 10 Station Offset Commands 212 Cut Sheet n1 Cut Sheet Function This command creates a report of the elevation difference between points and a design elevation which can be defined by a triangulation surface 3D polyline or design points The station and offset of the points can also be reported 1f a centerline is specified The Report Formatter option can be used to customize the report layout and to output the report data to Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access Cut Sheet Report i d x Grade Elevation From Paints C 30 Polpline f Triangulation File Lise Report Formatter Decimals For 2Y 0 000 Decimals For Z 0 000 Station Offset Options Define Centerline by E Palvline Points C Alignment None
91. 12 6 Rod Target Height lt 5 0 gt 5 12 Prompts 5 and 6 come up only if you have Instrument and Rod height prompting turned on in Point Defaults 7 Enter Point Elevation lt 1033 31 gt Press Enter You can accept the elevation calculated by this command 8 Enter point description Topo Shot 9 Exit Options Line Traverse Inverse Angle Bearing Code lt 6 gt gt E Prerequisite None Keyboard Command sideshot Enter Assign Point Function This command creates a point at the coordinates you specify The point is both stored in the current coordinate file and drawn on the screen e The command prompts for northing and easting Whether the program prompts for point number elevation and description depends on the settings in the Configure Carlson Survey Desktop command The point symbol and layer are also set in Configure CSD Prompts Enter North y 5000 2 Enter East x 5000 3 Enter Point Elevation lt gt 100 4 Enter Point Description lt gt START 5000 0 5000 0 100 00 5 Enter North y Press Enter to end Prerequisite None Keyboard Command eapoint Enter Assign Point 169 Raw File On Off Function This command toggles raw file creation When this option is active commands such as Traverse create entries in the current raw file RW5 If Raw File is turned on the Raw File On Off menu option will have a check mark character next to it Prerequisite RW5 file Keyboard Command OPENRAW
92. 233 88 5 40 6 00 4613 25 P7 8 AR261 2756 91 4405 387 25 5 42 6 00 5000 09 CLOSE Closure Results Before Angle Balance Starting Point 1 N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 Closing Reference Point 1 N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 Ending Point 8 N 5000 09 E 4999 97 Z 100 06 Azimuth Error 341 38 22 North Error 0 09061 East Error 0 03007 Vertical Error 0 05953 Hz Dist Error 0 09547 Sl Dist Error 0 11251 Traverse Lines gt 7 SideShots gt 1 Horiz Dist Traversed 2712 29 Slope Dist Traversed 2712 62 Closure Precision 1 in 28409 Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 120 Easting 5710 27 5791 20 5726 43 5230 59 5260 88 5245 67 5013 33 4999 97 Elev 103 29 106 36 108 22 117 37 113 36 114 85 112 36 100 06 Remainder of process report Compass Closure Adjusted Point Comparison Original Adjusted Point Northing Easting Northing Easting Dist Bearing 2 5038 445 5710 269 5038 440 5710 294 0 025 S 79 46 08 E 3 4587 914 5791 222 4587 907 5791 263 0 042 S 79 46 08 E 4 4397 319 5726 469 4397 310 5726 517 0 049 S 79 46 08 E 5 4363 044 5230 628 4363 032 5230 693 0 067 S 79 46 08 E 6 4586 509 5245 681 4586 496 5245 755 0 075 S 79 46 08 E 7 4613 178 5013 335 4613 163 5013 416 0 083 S 79 46 08 E 8 5000 017 4999 905 5000 000 5000 000 0 097 S 79 46 08 E Max adjustment 0 097 Starting Point 1 N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 BackSight Azimuth 178 00 42 Point Horizontal Zenith Slope Inst Rod
93. 33 880 90 2746 FI um 6 000 Code Hor zangle Slopebist Zenithang 261 2756 387 250 91 4405 CLOSE Notice that the record from point 7 to 8 is set as a CL AB record This tells the program that point 8 is the closing point and that the angle from 7 to 8 is the closing angle For traverse adjustment the closing reference point is 1 and the closure error is the difference between point 1 and point 8 For angle balance the reference closing angle is 358d0 42 178d0 42 180 The angle balance error is the difference between this reference angle and the angle from points 7 to 8 Now let s process using Compass adjustment with Angle Balance Choose Compass under the Process menu and fill out the dialogs as shown Closure Option Edit Process Raw File 119 First half of process report Process Results 05 23 2002 10 06 Raw file gt c scadxml data example rw5 Scale Factor 1 00000000 Correct for Earth Curvature OFF Starting Point 1 N 5000 00 E 5000 00 Z 100 00 BackSight Azimuth 178 00 42 Point Horizontal Zenith Slope Inst Rod Northing No Angle Angle Dist HT HT Description 2 AR268 5330 89 4050 711 32 5 32 6 00 5038 43 P2 3 AR262 5448 89 3236 457 76 5 43 6 00 4587 89 P3 4 AR208 5710 89 1803 201 31 5 40 6 00 4397 30 P4 5 AR247 1657 88 5235 497 12 5 40 6 00 4363 08 P5 19 AR289 3456 91 4405 112 45 5 40 6 00 4471 32 ssl 6 AR277 4835 90 2926 223 98 5 40 6 00 4586 54 P6 7 AR92 4143 90 2746
94. 4097 356 5200 426 397 873 TRI FACE 0 75 00 R15 87 129 4097 355 8200 425 397 873 TRI FACE 0 75 00 R15 88 130 4097 351 8200 422 397 873 TRI FACE 0 75 00 R15 88 131 4091 548 8196 708 397 879 TRI FACE 0 753 00 R22 77 132 4089 490 8195 390 397 691 TRI FACE 0 75 00 R25 21 133 4087 449 8194 0854 397 585 TRI FACE 0475 00 R27 64 134 4074 021 8185 488 396 248 TRI FACE 0475 00 R43 58 135 4060 192 6176 635 395 556 EXTRAPOLATED 0 75 00 R60 00 136 4153 171 8253 966 401 491 EXTRAPOLATED 0490 00 L60 00 137 4150 157 8252 036 403 604 TRI FACE 0 90 00 L56 42 138 4150 155 8252 035 403 605 TRI FACE 0420 00 L56 42 Humber of points listed 18 The report can be edited directly in the report viewer Report Viewer commands are described below X Open Opens an ASCII file and displays the contents in the report viewer Save Saves the contents of the report viewer to a text file SaveAs Saves the contents of the report viewer to a particular file Append To Appends the contents of the report viewer to another file Print Prints the contents of the report viewer This will open your regular Windows print dialog where you can choose the printer and modify any of the printer settings before printing Screen Draws the report in the current drawing The program will prompt you for a starting point text height rotation and layer Undo Reverses the effect of your last action If you inadvertently delete some text stop and choose the Undo command to resto
95. 43082 29f10 37015 4587 896193 23191 29884 43971 30585 3126 52999 Distance Observations From To Distance Std Error 111 40894 0 03536 457 74546 0 03494 201 29501 0 03470 Angle Observations Std Error 1 e 268 5330 15 185443 1 e 3 252 5358 13 68268 3 4 208 5710 30 36335 2 Distance Error Least Squares Input Data Point Northing Easting 1 5000 000 5000 000 8 5000 000 5000 000 Edit Process Raw File 109 Distance Observations Occupy FSight Distance StdErr 1 2 711 409 0 018 2 3 457 745 0 017 3 4 201 295 0 017 4 5 497 024 0 018 5 6 223 972 0 017 6 7 233 872 0 017 7 8 387 073 0 017 Angle Observations BSight Occupy FSight Angle StdErr 7 1 2 268d53 30 7 617 1 2 3 262d54 48 6 869 2 3 4 208d57 10 15 194 3 4 5 247d16 57 14 222 4 5 6 277d48 35 12 262 5 6 7 92d41 13 15 818 6 7 8 261d27 56 12 991 7 1 S 01d59 18 E 0 001 Process Process Least Squares Data This routine applies a least squares adjustment to the data stored in the LSQ associated with the current raw data RW5 file The closing errors are distributed among the other points using the Method of Least Squares Ref Wolf P R and Ghilani C D 1996 Adjustment Computations John Wiley and Sons NY Third Edition After the adjustment the rest of the raw file is processed to recalculate the sideshots There is an option to draw standard error ellipses around the adjusted points The ellipse axes are multi
96. 502 1 d T 5659 294 2135 2 3 6 0833 324 1 861 3 4 11 4907 275 6035 A 5 4357 308 6 466 5 10 2 2647 128 085 10 11 1 093 126 0102 11 12 0 3836 128 4250 12 3 3 36 144650 ADJUSTED ELEVATIONS Station Adjusted Eley Standard Dev 1 au O 5 O07 4862 D 02453 4 2075838 0 0443 3 9 4 5860 0 02832 4 903 1124 0 02091 10 909 7506 002536 11 210 441 0 03016 12 911 2273 0 03026 ADJUSTED MEASUREMENT SUMMARY From Ta Elev Df Residuals Lad usted 1 5 T 4862 0 0178 1 4 1 5835 0 0175 4 3 7 0031 0 0195 3 4 11 4745 00162 4 5 43139 00182 5 10 2 2644 0 0003 10 11 1 0935 0 0003 11 12 03832 0 0003 12 3 3 35808 0 0004 Sideshots Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 144 Station 20 21 ER 15 Elevation O01 918 911 404 910 293 909 75 SurvNET 145 Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 146 Field to Finish Field to Finish Function The Field to Finish command turns data collector field notes into a final AutoCAD drawing by matching the de scriptions of the field points with user defined codes The points are brought into the drawing with attributes defined by the code including layer symbol size line type etc Two files are used in Field to Finish a data file and a code file e The data file is the current Autodesk Land Desktop point database consisting of point names coordinates and text description fields The description fields contain codes for the Field to Finish processing The code file defines the layer symbo
97. 59 426 144651 StErr 0 0116 0 0116 00124 0 0113 0 0115 0 0147 0 0146 0 0144 0 0116 0 0126 0 0125 0 0142 0 0126 0 0126 The grid factor elevation factor and combined factor used to reduce the ground distance to a grid distance are included in the listing Grid Distances 14 Observations SurvNET 137 In the Adjusted Coordinates section there is a new section that displays the latitude and longitude of the fi nal adjusted points The convergence angle grid factor elevation factor and the combined factor are also displayed for each point From 5 ta 10 11 12 Adjusted Geographic Coordinates ota 20 al 10 11 12 Latitude 22 5418 0454 H 25 54 22 1 8238 N 45 5424 71981 N 45 54 32 8 5530 25 54 32 2 5088 N 45 54 36 6 L78 TN 45 5438 15404 NI 25 54 25 5 2242N 22 424 21748 H 45 54 25 26820 H To sta Grid Dust 5 220 458 4 282 221 3 324 195 4 213 611 20 134 666 21 116 076 5 308 655 10 129 Bag 11 126 014 12 129 429 3 144 655 Longitude 80 09 50 01222 W 80 0950 3885 TW 80 0942 54113 W 80 0549 2036 2 W 20 09 59 67503 W 80 0952 45127 W 80 09 54 71 776 W 80 0956 51499 W 80 0952 05512 W eD Dg a4 39720 W Trid Factor 100002753 1 00002201 100002502 1100002752 100002773 100002759 1 Dno 725 1000002734 100002755 100002775 100002782 A Factor 29909077 29999977 299959077
98. 837 13 4338 55 8 57 17 1 4814 57 4325 34 10 08 17 17 4768 07 4942 63 3 71 17 17 4720 63 4943 02 10 39 17 17 4672 47 4343 55 11 02 17 17 4640 63 4935 52 11 57 17 17 4605 96 4916 00 11 83 17 17 jh 7 45 4880 78 18 35 tp tp 4504 61 4821 33 13 78 17 17 4436 63 4755 16 16 09 17 17 4370 28 4693 94 16 34 17 17 111 L DO 0 A cm mM ri L a A A E O A O D co co cn P to Pi rna a e IE d sep n n din d lt Under Raw Desc column you see the descriptions used in this file Code LP is used more than once We may assume for this exercise that it indicates a Light Pole Code 17 1s more mysterious but it is used repeatedly and if you examine the drawing you will note that these codes circle the site Code 17 and its companion code 18 are candidates for linework Note that the elevations are less then 50 No matter who conducted the survey we can jump start a drawing by making some assumptions that create linework and symbols Starting a New Field to Finish Code Table Most companies using Field to Finish have a coding system that is deliberately designed A code such as EOP might be edge of pavement and DL might be ditch line etc But in our case we must react to a coordinate file with random descriptions You can plot the points but why not do more by making some automatic lines and symbols To begin select Field to Finish in the Survey pulldown menu Field
99. AK Result an screen would be OAK TREE TREE OAK Result an screen would be OAK TCTLTC2 VLTB amp stops TC1 continues TC as a paint on a cure and closes VLT6 as a rectangle using the Bearing Close code NOTE The use of the Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only toggle is recommended when using Eagle Point Coding Use Multiple Codes for Linework Only When checked and multiple codes are detected only linework will be drawn for the secondary codes Points are only created based on the primary code If you want symbols for all multiple codes uncheck this setting Max Length for Linework Specifies the maximum length that Field to Finish will draw any section of linework Max Elevation Difference for Linework With CSD under the option Code Table Settings shown below you can limit the elevation difference within which linework will connect i e if you were taking fence line shots on a ridgeline fence then took a series of fence line shots in the valley the ridge linework would stop and not connect to the valley linework if the elevation exceeded an entered amount If you wish to disable this elevation detection for linework keep the setting for the elevation high as shown below in the upper right of the dialog Field to Finish 151 Code Table Settings Select Code File c scadxml DATA prepa fd e Process SurvCADD Coding C Process Eagle Point Coding Process CAICE Coding Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix
100. AR200 56 49 3 AR282 17 53 3 4 AR208 56 58 4 AR220 44 33 4 5 AR247 16 53 5 AR280 00 00 5 5 6 6 6 7 8 7 AER q Cu CU 4 d 4 t QN nin 18 AR289 34 56 6 AR27 74842 AR181 34 00 104 AR237 1 7 59 7 AR92 41 47 AR261 28 03 AR135 00 00 8 9 10 11 12 SDIST 711 320 457 761 155 441 149 271 201 303 299 989 497 091 100 002 112 490 223 985 159 886 179 680 233 884 387 278 141 113 ZENANG 89 40 57 89 32 41 90 00 00 90 17 29 89 18 05 88 54 32 8859240 90 00 00 91 44 05 90 29 28 93 17 57 92 56 07 90 27 48 91 44 09 90 00 01 To NORTH 5013 759 4560 688 4409 080 4571 365 4372 460 4229 325 4355 416 4454 431 4462 582 45 8 228 4736 515 4659 286 4612 970 5000 070 5099 870 Attrib Options EAST 5711 176 9776 433 5742 126 5627 546 5705 108 9441 530 5208 404 9222 302 5242 434 9231 219 5251 814 2391 312 4999 937 5000 007 4900 243 ELEV 103 262 106 329 105 759 105 000 108 184 113 296 129 136 128 536 125 130 126 616 116 814 116 815 124 124 111 813 111 233 User Attrib This option allows for the creation of attributes that allows for mathematical calculations The math functions allowed are addition subtraction multiplication and division This option is detailed further in the General section of this manual Attrib Options This option allows for the addition editing importing
101. Angle Several angle output options are set at the second prompt in Options The angle can be reported as either Bearing Azimuth Gon or Angle Right You can also set an option to report with decimal seconds at the next prompt Arc You can inverse around an arc by inversing to the PC and then entering A for the Arc option The command will ask for the radius point the curve direction left or right and the PT point The curve data is then reported There is an unequal PC Radius and PT Radius distance check The tolerance for this check 1s set in the Area Label Defaults command under the Area menu Prerequisite None Chapter 6 COGO Commands 166 Keyboard Command inverse Occupy Point Function This command sets the occupied point and backsight angle for COGO commands such as Traverse Prompts 1 Set Occupied Point 2 Pick point or point number When setting the occupied point you can pick a point on the screen enter coordinates at the command line or type in a point number that will be read from the current coordinate file 3 Set backsight method Azimuth Bearing None lt Point gt Four options are available for determining the back sight direction Azimuth Bearing None and Point Azimuth and Bearing Enter the backsight angle in the selected format None Sets the backsight to an azimuth of 0 north Point Pick a point on the screen input coordinates or type a point number that will be read from the curre
102. As Cancel Target Area Assign a target area for the calculation Area Units Choose between square feet or acres Draw Area As Choose whether the resulting areas will be displayed as closed polylines or as areas with only side lines drawn 4 Select curve to radiate from pick the curve 5 Select back polyline pick the polyline The computed lines are drawn perpendicular from the front polyline and intersect the back polyline This computed line is moved to find the target area Both ends of the front and back polylines are connected to close the area Prerequisite An existing area defined by points or polylines Keyboard Command AREARC Area Radial from Curve 231 Chapter 13 Area Commands 282 Survey Text Commands 14 Survey Text Defaults Function This command sets the defaults for the Offset Dimensions Building Dimensions and Adjoiner Text commands Text Defaults Building Dimensions allows you to set text specifications for building dimensions Layer Allows you to set the layer for the building text Text Style Allows you to set the text style for the building text Text Size Scaler This value multiplied by the horizontal scale determines the actual text size Decimal Places Allows you to set the display precision for the building dimensions Drop Trailing Zeros Allows you to truncate trailing zeros from dimensions Characters To Append Allows you to set characters
103. BR E CIE OR UR Ro Bearing Bearing Intersect llle Bearing Distance Intersect 0004 Distance Distance Intersect 2 uou wo ee awed Hae wee ee RescuoOn 22he neck ee en eee he eee eae nee ee ees Ponton ATC s amos AE Be Os s Divide Between Points 0 0 000042 ee eee Divide Along Entity 422 sis oso 9 9 3 5 x Interval Along Entity soso rosso rr XR ewe XS Create Points from Entities vus o o Ro oe oy oos Building Offset Extensions lll len Erase POIMIS uem mox eR de x m A m REE Chapter 8 Edit Process Level Data Edit Process Level Data Chapter 9 Deed Commands Enter Deed DESCADION SHED ES Process Deed File Deed Correlation Legal Description 33 te Ae ee e e ee eR xw Chapter 10 Station Offset Commands Label Station Offset lle OBSer POE s aso 35 R9 5446 we owe He Calculate Offsets 2 Chapter11 Cut Sheet Cut Sheet 2o ck wes Row x ox WX O se cd du SEEKER a Chapter 12 Layout Commands Lot Layout x23 dedos RE CR OK EO Offsets amp Intersections 000 2 ee ee eee Culsde sacS i1 6 wx doe woo RBGORORO O WOSOWOROR OE EEE EEK Contents IV 4 Sided BUUdINE ss apodaca AAA ub XE m P UN A ER d 223 Pare lt lt xu soo R EE SR SREZWAGEESISSEASEKERSEUESESSRPSSAS FEDES 224 Chapter 13 Area Commands 229 Mea Lapeer S 223
104. Carlson Survey Desktop Release 2 Carlson Software Inc User s manual July 20 2005 Contents Chapter 1 Product Overview Product Overview Installing Carlson Survey Desktop sw ux eR Pedo ss Authorizing Carlson Survey Desktop 4 wx dw 94x x bg x a4 deed be ee heawins Report Formatter Standard Report Viewer yu ums ce xo m a EA AAA Chapter 2 Tutorials Field to Finish from Coordinate Data esL Planned Field to Finish coc cms o9 9o x eb eee ok wee Se wh Rew 9x we Ee Network Least quail 245 6 ho doe be E BOR PUE oA ds wx qu Noe WP wan ue x Chapter 3 Data Collectors Data Collectors Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File Edit Process Raw File 4 rrr a n SurvNET Sure NEI Overview u mowuncs oe a Xo 6 X9 EO o o RHE DEE OEE Se Xo 9x Xs Network Least Squares Settings uon ko pom Roux ROO OR 9 ow thane Ewe o Vertial Adjustment Report x uc costara dS ee oad ROE GREE eH EH OEE WY sample Coordinate System Report ua o meo Ey 3 RE ee ee wee Se Chapter 5 Field to Finish Field to Finish Chapter 6 COGO Commands Inverse x 4 x s Occupy Point Traverse Side Shots Enter Assign Point Raw File On Off O WO N E 12 I5 14 19 20 39 47 39 60 iii Line ONO Luo uoo sesion Chapter 7 Point Commands Draw Locate Points v uuo xe X 2668848 46 oR BSS amp Bs Pick Intersection Points zz E ox wow oxUEUSO
105. Check Point Code Distance Tolerance Horizontal 0 50 Vertical Store Point Records Store Point Records To CRD File Always Report Store Points Hold Store Points Direct Reverse Settings Direct Reverse Vertical Angles 8 Balance Direct Reverse Direct Only Foresight Backsight Measurements Balance Foresight Backsight 8 Foresight Only Horizontal Angle Tolerance Seconds 30 0 Flip Angle Tolerance Seconds 30 0 Distance Tolerance 1 0000 Drawing Points and Linework Draw By Field To Finish Auto Process Settings gt Multiple Measurement Settings These options provide control for managing how multiple measurements to the same pointare handled and reported Distance Tolerance Horizontal and Vertical Allows for user input of desired tolerance values for multiple mea surements Exceeded tolerances will be displayed on the process results report With the Report Residuals option ON the residual values of the measurements will be shown on the process results report The data to be averaged can be either the Distance Measurements or the Coordinates Process Settings Check Point Settings These options provide user controls for survey check points With Report Check Points ON any point coded as a check point in the raw data file will be reported When selected the Check Point Code and Distance Tolerance fields become active and allow forediting The Check Point Code is a user specified code entered in during the survey tha
106. Connection Method OQ Average Endpoints Together Directly Connect Endpoints C3 Fillet With Radius Zero Convert lines into polylines Join only identical layers Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 33 This means the join will directly connect the two polylines and deal with a separation of up to 82 feet and will also allow for different endpoint elevations Select OK and the result is shown below Note that Join Nearest is also useful for joining contour lines that are composed of small unattached segments into single entity contours for each elevation In this case you would set the Max separation to join to 1 never try to join if the gap exceeds 1 unit and you would select Join only common elevations Join Nearest has many distinct uses as you will see below Extend by Distance One goal might be to create a hatched area for a 30 unit wide road by offsetting the dashed line closing its ends then hatching it then removing the two end segments First however you might want to make the road a little longer than was actually surveyed You can do this visually simply choosing how much to extend each end using the command Extend by Distance After selecting Extend by Distance pick very close to the left end of the dashed polyline then select an appropriate distance to the left to extend it You can extend by selecting Repeat for the right side You may notice that the program will auto pan in some cases so just zoom an
107. DATA Drawingl crd Scale Factor 1 00000000 Correct for Earth Curvature OFF Starting Point 1 N 5000 000 E 5000 000 z 100 000 BackSight Point 21 N 5100 000 E 4900 000 z 100 000 Point Horizontal Zenith Slope Inst Rod Northing No Angle Angle Dist ET ET Description 2 AR133 5330 89 4057 711 320 5 320 6 000 5013 75 103 262 IPF Disturbed 3 AR262 5444 89 3241 457 761 5 430 6 000 4560 106 329 X on Rock 100 AR200 5649 90 0000 155 441 5 430 6 000 4409 08 12 105 755 TT 105 AR282 1753 90 1729 149 271 5 430 6 000 4571 3 105 000 gs AR208 5658 89 1805 201 303 5 400 6 000 4372 4 E 108 184 AR220 4433 88 5432 299 989 5 400 6 000 4229 32 gt 113 296 AR247 1653 88 5240 497 091 5 400 6 000 4355 416 5208 404 129 136 amp The Custom Report Formatter allows for customization of the process results by selecting the fields and the layout of the fields to display The settings can be saved to a format name and recalled when needed Options to Delete Export and Import saved Formats are also available Report Formatter Options Fomat RAWEDIT E Available Used Sort Line s B a Al Backpt No BackAzi OccupyPt No VertAngle Point No ElevDiff HorzAngle No HorzDist SlopeDist No InstHT ZenithAng No RodHT Northing No Desc vi Easting No Scale Elev No AngleRight ort Field Nic MS Columnar format Use commas in numbers 8 Auto width Fixedwidth 20 Ignore repeating fields
108. Deed File 207 Process Deed File 207 Process Least Squares Data 264 Product Overview 1 2 Radius Point 205 Railroad 245 249 252 Raw File On Off 176 Reduce Polyline Vertices 224 Reduce Polyline Vertices 225 Registration 11 15 290 Remove 9 11 45 148 200 263 Remove Polyline Arcs 227 Remove Polyline Segment 228 Remove Polyline Vertex 229 Remove Polyline Segment 40 Removing 227 Renumber Points 134 repackaged vii Report 15 18 21 47 72 121 122 125 126 142 207 214 230 248 251 252 2771 274 Report Formatter 15 Report Grade Elevation 248 Report Log 21 Resection 184 Reverse 19 111 132 133 206 224 Reverse Polyline 224 Reverse Polyline 224 245 RW 22 80 83 84 86 89 93 97 99 100 103 106 108 112 114 118 121 125 133 136 138 176 205 231 232 259 261 264 279 Sample Coordinate System Report 281 Save 18 19 33 61 67 72 114 146 148 201 Scale 56 123 126 129 259 261 264 281 Screen Pick Point 168 Set Polyline Origin 227 Side Shots 177 Sliding Side Area 240 Slope Distance 186 SMI 2 54 89 90 112 Smooth Polyline 146 Softdesk 113 Sokkia Leitz 94 112 Sokkia SDR 95 96 Special 142 151 154 SRVPNO 146 Standard 68 118 120 211 216 232 264 268 270 273 285 Standard Report Viewer 18 standard deviation 75 264 272 274 276 278 Startup Wizard 64 State Plane 122 126 128 131 258 260 266 278
109. Distinct Code options This command will print the different codes in the data file and identify any undefined codes Undefined code found prior to drawing Fa Point 1 has undefined code f Abort without drawing anything C Use default settings for this point Use default settings for all undefined cades Chapter 5 Field to Finish 156 Abort without drawing anything Lets you stop to correct the code table Use the default settings for this point This default is to draw a point in the MISC layer with no linework To set your own default define a code called SC_DFLT Use the default settings for all undefined codes Continue processing and use default code for all undefined codes Preview Only When checked this option will temporarily draw the points and linework and allow you to review 1t with zoom and pan Auto Zoom Extents When checked this will force a zoom extents after Field to Finish is done Special Codes Field to Finish recognizes several special codes suffixes A special code comes after the regular code A space separates the codes Here is a listing of the default special codes e PC Begins a three point arc The point with this special code is the first point on the arc The next point with the code is considered a point on the arc and third point with the code is the arc endpoint Example in point number X Y Z description format 10 500 500 0 EP PC start curve
110. E 3 SW 4 NW AR amp raquo Angle Right angle code 7 AL amp raquo Angle Left angle code 6 DR amp raquo Deflection Angle Right angle code 9 DL amp raquo Deflection Angle Left angle code 8 one of the following 3 ZE amp raquo Zenith Angle 90 degrees level VA amp raquo Vertical Angle 0 degrees level CE amp raquo Change Difference in Elevation from Instrument Point SD amp raquo Slope Distance if ZE or VA above HD amp raquo Horizontal Distance if CE above amp raquo Point Description Note Traverse Examples C z 1 103 29 100 06 Ath ft Close Pl START T P a co c c2 I E E E 105456 This first example is a closed traverse with an internal backsight of azimuth 178d0 42 Use the functions under the Add menu to create and fill out the raw file as shown here Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 118 Northing Easting Elevation Description 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 START BsPt Azi Sethzi 178 0042 0 0000 RodHt 6 000 FsPt Horz ngle SlopeDist Zenith ng Description la 258 5330 711 320 89 4050 P2 ETH 6 000 FasPt Horz ngle lopeDbist enithing Description 3 262 5448 457 760 69 3236 P3 oum 6 000 FsPt Horz ngle SlopeDist Zenith ng Description 4 C1208 5710 201 310 89 1803 P4 5 247 1657 497 120 88 5235 P5 119 1289 3456 112 45 91 4405 6 277 4835 223 980 90 2926 P6 17 92 4143 2
111. ES Chapter 20 Help About Carlson Survey Desktop 2 oa cuca v 3 9o Rp B3 RRO0E ox 43 3 OnLMS HOD ku xwv 3 9 4343 9353 5 3 5S de meme a D Technical SUpDOL a s x20 x H 9 x GEER U x 403 ERE SEER SRE 4 4 3 790808 He Y EDU E Product Overview Product Overview Carlson Survey Desktop CSD 1s a companion program for Autodesk Autodesk Land Desktop that adds more tools for surveying The CSD commands include data collection raw data processing Field to Finish and COGO features These features are fully integrated into the Autodesk Land Desktop project environment Data Collection The power of CSD begins with data collection CSD handles all major collectors from Geodimeter and TDS to Leica Nikon Sokkia and SMI The raw data is stored in RW5 format and can be viewed edited and processed The processing or calculation of coordinates recognizes direct and reverse and other forms of multiple mea surement and processes sets of field measurements Surveys can be balanced and closed by selective use of angle balance compass transit Crandall and least squares methods or simply by direct calculation with no adjustment Commands exist for finding bad angles and for plotting the traverse and sideshot legs of the survey in distinct col ors as a means of searching for busts or errors In addition to downloading data from electronic data collectors CSD accepts manual entry of field notes directly into spreadsheet forma
112. Ec0 0000 File Size 12341 File Name Date Modified Tue Jan 27 15 21 07 2004 Tutarial3 reb CA Documents and settingssddipinta D esktop a Tue dan Z7 Make sure both the path and file name are Files in that folder 1 etam Step 3 The raw data editor is now displayed The top half of the window is a grid view of the raw data The bottom half of the window displays a graphical view of the data Use this editor to make changes to the raw data file 1f errors exist As the raw data used in the tutorial contains no errors we may proceed to process the data Chapter 2 Tutorials 48 Raw Editor RW5 gt C WMstutoriall stutorial rw5 CRD gt C stutorialWstutorial crd File Edit Display Add Process Compute Pts Tools Help d T H too 7 T H ms c 3 j aie EGER 2 HET lt Northing Easting Elevation Desc 203743 5690 786686 05 859 9210 203988 3200 786686 05 887 9500 RodHt 4 570 BsPt i Setizi 503 0 0000 RodHt 4 670 FsPt Code Horzingle SlopeDist zenith ng Desc 503 eser 246 302 83 3400 502 AR 256 0734 81 015 80 2305 B2 AR 178 174fR EHI MA SOC AT 913 383 p sie 510 506 2209 1905 4808 Step 4 From the Process Compute Pts pulldown menu choose the Least Squares Network Least Squares option as shown below Raw Editor RW5 C and settings Jdipinto Wesktop Hensley points rw File Edit Display Add iii Tools Help Angle Balance Compass Crandall
113. File 92 Color Settings Eg Measurement EN Set Collection m Instrument Rod Hgt mi Backsight adi Point MN Note E Elevation E Azimuth E Standard Errors ni Headers Ld The color slide beside the select button shows the current setting for the record After selecting the record the Select Color dialog box will be display Select the Set button next to the desired color for the record Select Color Eq Cancel Display gt Hide Row This option allows for hiding single or multiple rows This could be used to prevent crucial information from being accidently altered during editing of data or data entry Hiding a record does not exclude it from processing To hide a record click on the row number at the far left of the editor The entire row of data will highlight now select the Hide Row option Multiple rows or data can be selected by selecting the first row of data to hide then while holding down the shift key on the keyboard select the last row to hide All rows in between these two selections will be highlighted now select Hide Row When a row or rows of data are hidden the row numbers will reflect the hidden rows For example Figure 2 below shows a multiple selection of rows 10 17 to hide Figure 2A shows the editor with the rows hidden Notice that the row numbers indicate hidden rows by showing a gap from rows 9 18 Edit Process Raw File 93 Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C Scad2005 Data Drawing1 crd OX Fi
114. Front Polyline goes from right to left Resulting lots numbered using Sequential Numbers Keyboard Command lotlay Prerequisite A frontage polyline and a backlot polyline Offsets amp Intersections Function This command takes a set of centerline polylines and calculates the series of offset polylines using the user defined offset and fillet radius values The function recognizes primary and secondary roadways which allows for different offsets and fillet radii to be specified for each Up to seven sets of offsets and radii can be defined for different features such as edge of pavement right of way sidewalk etc Each set also has a layer name and description The Pick button lets you set the layer name by picking an entity with that layer in the drawing The description is for your own information and is not used by the program Multiple centerline polylines can be processed together which allows for the creation of an entire set of roadway offset polylines in one step Intersections are calculated based on the centerlines selected and the fillet radii are applied at the intersections The Smooth Interior and Exterior Corner options will fillet bends in the offset polylines Otherwise turns without an arc in the original centerline will become straight corners in the offset polylines The results of the calculations for the given parameters may be previewed in the dialog Zoom and pan are available by clicking and dragging mouse on the preview
115. HAIL SE PK i TRAVERSE EU A CRD To Field Code Definitions E xu STAKE m TRAVERSE Road Do vau want to append the current CROSS CUT table or create a new one CONTROL MOUNMENTS lt New Code Definitions To create a table from new unexpected or third party coordinate point descriptions choose Code Table by Points Chapter 2 Tutorials 24 and select New to create a new table The dialog shown below is typical of those used in CSD to create new files Specify Field Code Definition File fld New Recent Folders C Program filessLand desktop 2004 5urveydesktop Data huc Save as Data Folder Alla anit Name the new coding file Tutoriall and click Save to create the file The Field to Finish coding files have a fld extension as shown at the top of the dialog Deleting Table Entries This brings you to a table that is preset to show all descriptions found in the coordinate file If you examine the drawing closely note that many of the displayed descriptions appear once or are used as generic descriptions e g Ground Shot and gr and therefore aren t useful for linework or for meaningful symbol selection We can select these as shown by holding down the Ctrl key and selecting each one standard Windows procedure for selecting multiple objects and then select Cut from the dialog box to remove them from our list Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 25 Field to Finish DATA Land projects 004 Land Cogo Fonts
116. Hold NO Protocol NONE 2 Check the settings under the PORT menu Typical port settings are baud 9600 parity none data 8 stop 1 and handshake XON XOFF 3 Now in CSD run Data Collection and choose Surveyor s Assistant Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 4 Select the Download button and within ten seconds return to Surveyor s Assistant and press GO 5 If the All Data option is used then the Leitz format will contain both coordinate and raw data The coordinate data is stored to project point database and the raw data is converted to a CSD raw data RW5 file Uploading 1 Point data from the CSD coordinate file can be uploaded into the Surveyor s Assistant First go to the Transfer command on the main menu Fill out the screen as follows e Direction INPUT e Format LEITZ e Port COMI or COM2 e Protocol NONE 2 Go back to CSD and run Data Collection selecting Surveyor s Assistant Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 3 Click the Upload button A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload 4 Before clicking the OK button for range of points return to Surveyor s Assistant and hit the GO function key The Surveyor s Assistant is now waiting to receive 5 Return to CSD and click OK on the range of point dialog Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpos
117. Network Least Squares Results dialog Main Report The main contain the Least Squares Adjustment Report the Horizontal Adjustment Report and the Statistics This last Statistics section displays some statistical measures of the adjustment including the number of iterations needed for the solution to converge the degrees of freedom of the network the reference variance the standard error of unit weight and the results of a Chi square test The degree of freedom is an indication of how many redundant measurements are in the survey Degree of freedom is defined as the number of measurements in excess of the number of measurements necessary to solve the network The standard error of unit weight relates to the overall adjustment and not an individual measurement A value of one 1 indicates that the results of the adjustment are consistent with a priori standard errors The reference variance is the standard error of unit weight squared The chi square test 1s a test of the goodness of fit of the adjustment It is not an absolute test of the accuracy of the survey The a priori standard errors which are defined in the project settings dialog box or with the SE record in the raw data file are used to determine the weights of the measurements These standard errors can be thought of as an estimate of how accurately the measurements were made The Chi square test only tests whether the results of the adjusted measurements are consistent with the a priori sta
118. Point Survey 7 Deed 2 Translate X 2 956 Y 1 310 Rotation 0 03 10 Survey Pt Deed Pt Bearing 2 S 62 38 22 3 S 78 33 32 4 S 62 16 06 5 S 71 43 06 Deed Correlation 197 SurvCADD Edit C scad2006new USER scadrprt tmp File Edit Settings 2405390 Open Save Print Exit f ide Minimum Deed Rotation Report 2 24 2005 14 47 Hold Pivot Point Survey 10 Deed 5 Rotation Point Survey 7 Deed 2 Translate X 0 052 Y 0 214 Rotation 0 02 58 Survey Pt Deed Pt Bearing 6 1 N 71735 09 7 2 s 10 40 01 B 3 N 31 02 38 9 4 s 73 20 09 Deed Correlation File to Process def New Existing RecentFolders caScad20050 AM zl 7 7 Files in that folder File Size 26 Date Modified Sat Feb 19 12 35 13 2005 coor dcf Data Preview Drawing2 dcf 16 1 17 2 16 3 19 4 110 5 Recently used files File name Folder Size Date ge rca o 7 Keyboard Command deed_align Prerequisite Coordinates Legal Description Function The Legal Description Writer allows you to create a detailed legal description from a polyline This description Chapter 9 Deed Commands 198 consists of calculated calls point descriptions from CSD points and numerous terms you can define You can easily change the values associated with these terms and store the new values as defaults The initial dialog box 1s shown below Lega
119. Prompts 1 Interpolate elevations lt N gt press enter If you want to have the elevations calculated at the points then respond with Y for yes 2 Point to divide interpolate from Pick point or point number pick a point PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 1 4252 76 4158 32 0 00 3 Point to divide interpolate to Pick point or point number pick a point 4 Number of Segments Divisions 3 The command then locates 2 points Prerequisite Locate two points to divide If you want to interpolate elevation they should have a real Z axis elevation Keyboard Command DIVLIN Divide Along Entity Function This command divides an entity such as a line polyline or arc You select the entity and specify the desired number of segments Divide Along Entity then locates the computed points along that entity Prompts 1 Interpolate Elevations lt N gt Press Enter If you want to have the elevations calculated at the points then respond with Y for yes 2 Select Entity to Divide pick an entity 3 Number of Segments Divisions 12 Divide Between Points 181 The command then locates 11 points Prerequisite If you want to interpolate elevations you must locate two points that have real Z axis elevations Keyboard Command DIVENT Interval Along Entity Function This command creates points at a specified distance along a line arc or polyline The points are stored in the current coordinate file and drawn on the
120. Sort by Change or E Adobe Acrobat 6 0 Standard Size 206 00MB Remove Programs Adobe Download Manager 1 2 Remove Only i5 Advanced Networking Pack For Windows XP L A AOL Instant Messenger Size B 92MB Add New BE Autodesk Express Viewer Size S 95MB S Programs FS Autodesk Land Desktop 2004 Size 573 00MB m Carlson Survey Desktop Size 39 70MB Add Remowe Used rarely Windows Last Used On 1 9 2004 Components To change this program or remove it From your computer click o Change Remove e iy Carlson SurvMet Size 4 80MB Set Program a DYMO Label Software Sze 11 61MB Access and Defaults Be Google Toolbar for Internet Explorer Size 0 72MB i HighMAT Extension to Microsoft Windows xP CD Writing Size 2 15MB Wizard dh HP Internet Printer Connection Size 0 43MB Chapter 1 Product Overview 8 Select Change Remove to uninstall Carlson Survey Desktop and all of 1ts components Authorizing Carlson Survey Desktop The first time you start Carlson Survey Desktop the Registration Wizard is displayed Registration Wizard E Registration Options Form Fill in information and send registration form response in 48 hours or less ntemet Register on line instantly C Enter change key C Register Later By clicking Nest user confirms uninstallation of upgraded copies andor uninstallation of Carlson Software fram old hardware e Note Carlson Software has implemented an automated procedu
121. Sort field Ao amp Up C Down v Autowidth Fised width Ignore repeating fields Totals only Total TEN Excel Export Options Include Totals Include Text Lines Export to Excel Access Database Export Options File Select Table Export to MDB Display Edit User Attributes Altr Options Export to Text A5LII File Exit Subsequent sortings do not modify the sortings of previous columns To generate the report after selecting columns and other preferences click on Display button It will bring up a standard built in viewer with the report Upon exiting the viewer you may return to the Report Formatter for further data manipulation if needed The other data output options include saving the specified data into comma delimited text file or direct export to Microsoft Excel Below is the List Points report described above Chapter 1 Product Overview 12 Carlson Software Edit C Program Files Carlson Software 20021 scadrprt tmp C3 File Edit Settings Es Print List Points Open Save 11 30 2002 14 41 File c program files carlson software 20021data examplel crd Joh Description gt Job Humber 0 000 Job Date gt 707 1111 Point Horthing Easting Eler 121 4148 898 8233 421 402 505 122 4141 590 8228 742 401 679 123 4137 670 8226 233 401 979 124 4129 698 8221 129 401 401 175 4127 577 8219 772 399 943 126 424 575 8217 850 398 321 127 4121 127 8215 643 398 201 128
122. Store Station Text to CRD File Stores the station and offset values in the point descriptions in a coordinate file Display Offsets Ahead Behind Centerline Shows offsets for points or picked points located before the beginning station and after the ending station of the centerline Label Station and Offsets Draws station offset labels Sort Report by Stations Reports the station offsets in station order no matter what order the points were calculated Report Point Coordinates Includes the point northing and easting in the report Use Report Formatter Customizes the layout of the report fields outputs the data to Microsoft Excel or Access Round Stations Rounds the selected stations to the interval specified in the Rounding Interval field Rounding Interval Specify the amount of rounding to use when rounding stations Available only if Round Stations is checked Report Grade Elevation From Calculates an elevation for each point from a 3D polyline grid GRD file or triangulation FLT file To use this option the Report Formatter option must be toggled ON The grade elevation is reported and compared with the point elevation to report the cut fill Polyline The grade elevation is calculated by finding the elevation at the point on the 3D polyline that is the nearest perpendicular position from the offset point The 3D polyline that is used for elevations does not need to be the same polyline used as the centerline for the station offse
123. WCor 6 0 00 Ww Sicle 40x60 3 0 00 LP We conclude that there is a building edge from point 5 to point 6 that represents the NW portion of a 40x60 building Start by connecting a polyline from point 5 to 6 using the node snap The rest can be accomplished by Extend by Distance After choosing Extend by Distance select the segment from 5 to 6 on the half of the segment closer to 6 That places the arrowhead for the direction to extend pointing southward from point 6 LP din pr NDS E SD UA D sun m 2 46D NwCor amp 3 Le Ad 2 ag 0 00 18 37 Sox WSlde40x60 2 3 L LO TO re 26 a MAE 26 SAAB m H 18 des 8 E 17 x0 00 A 172 o IP o BB tea ook eb 54 M A M 4 I Model Pick line or pline tn extend Enter or pick distance to Draw A B C E I L M N O P R S T U Help T60 Several command line options are available A is for angle C for Close etc The T option is for Total Distance or if you prefer TO a distance So entering T60 goes to a total distance of 60 Then you enter L40 for left 40 then L60 for left 60 then C for Close and you have your building shown below hatched with diagonal lines Chapter 2 Tutorials 36 A Trick to Help Analyze your Survey Data Reactive Field to Finish 1s often used by companies who have deliberate well designed coding systems of their own When Survey work is outsourced the codes used can t be controlled In
124. WTHORN 54219398 2323222 2s 37 1000 00 38 5000 00 39 700 000 Portion of typical Survis raw data file OCCUPY PNT 621 616 5 140 148 36076 10255015 7245 3790987 2398 87 6695 ir 10255535 8009 3790669 8100 100 3900 ir COMMENT_ Thu Apr 08 08 14 14 1999 BACKSIGHT 0 00000 90 33400 609 4200 11 900 ir _SIDESHOT_ 100 18 47550 90 55000 17 4200 5 300 TP gps1 Portion of typical Fieldbook raw data file NE 32 10696 4141 10043 5613 SN SET AZ 32 27 0 STN 32 BS 27 AD 27 0 00000 NULL SN SET AD 33 183 23250 183 660 SN SET Portion of typical SurvCOGO raw data file 19100 0 19101 5 5 25 4 7 35 15 550 91 23 START 19101 19100 19102 5 5 15 4 7 35 15 120 23 88 34 19102 19101 19103 5 5 2 4 7 125 1444 180 41 90 Edit Process Raw File 125 19103 19102 19104 5 5 2 4 7 125 15 240 03 90 19104 19103 19105 5 5 3 4 7 315 15 305 5 90 IRON PIN 19105 19104 19106 5 5 4 4 7 215 15 140 35 90 IRON PIN 19106 19105 19107 5 5 05 4 7 215 15 200 90 TACK IN FENCE 19107 19106 19108 5 5 2 4 7 300 23 400 90 Keyboard Command rawedit Prerequisite None SurvNET SurvNET Overview The Network Least Squares Adjustment program SurvNET performs a mathematically rigorous least squares ad justment and statistical analysis of a network of raw traverse field data SurvNET is located within the Edit Process Raw Data File
125. a can be defined by a closed polyline or by picking each point in the perimeter e The desired area can be entered in either square feet or acres e The area to adjust must be represented by a closed polyline The program moves the selected segment of the polyline in or out e The original direction of the segment is maintained Prompts 1 Define area by points or closed polyline Points lt Linework gt Press Enter 2 Select polyline segment to adjust pick a line segment of polyline 3 Keep existing polyline Yes lt No gt Press Enter 4 Acres Enter target area s f A 5 Enter target area acres 0 45 Segment to adjust Adjusted segment Prerequisite A closed perimeter polyline Keyboard Command SSAREA Area Radial from Curve Function This command allows you to draw lines radial from a curve to reach a predetermined area Prompts 1 Define area by points or closed polyline Points lt Linework gt Press Enter 2 You define the existing area by selecting polylines or by picking each point in the perimeter For the point method the last entity you select when defining the figure should be the curve from which you are radiating For the polyline method select front and back polylines Chapter 13 Area Commands 230 3 In the Area Radial from Curve dialog box shown below you must set parameters for the area calculation Area Radial from Curve E Target rea 5000 000 Area Units Draw Area
126. a collector select the Communications command from the main menu Choose Data Format SDR 2 Select the Send function key Then choose Select Jobs 3 From the list of Jobs highlight the job to transfer and set it to Yes with the arrow keys 4 In CSD run Data Collection choose Sokkia SDR Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 5 Select the Download button and within ten seconds go back to SDR and press OK 6 The SDR format contains both coordinate and raw data The coordinate data 1s converted to a CSD coordinate file and the raw data is converted to a CSD raw data RW5 file The original SDR transfer file 1s stored on the computer as a RAW file SDR 33 The SDR 33 has different modes for storing and transferring data In coordinate mode the download will create points in the coordinate file and the raw data RW5 file will only contain some basic header lines In the raw data mode the download will create all the measurement data in the raw file and no points will be created in the coordinate file For this raw data mode you will need to run Edit Process Raw Data to calculate the points from the raw data The third mode in the SDR 33 creates both raw data in the raw data RW5 file and points in the coordinate file The Include Time Stamps in Notes option sets whether all the date time records for each point are put in the raw data RW5 file as description records The Include Point Attributes in Notes option will sto
127. a range of point numbers e g 1 9 The closure precision is calculated by dividing the total distance inversed by the closure error The distance between the starting and ending points is the closure error e To report the distances in both feet and meters select the Label Both Feet amp Meters for Inverse with Area option in the Area Label Defaults dialog box The area can be labeled in the drawing using the settings from the Area Label Defaults command Prompts 1 Station lt Pick starting point or number gt select a point 2 Pick point or point numbers R Radius Pt U Undo Enter to end select a point 3 Pick point or point numbers R Radius Pt U Undo Enter to end R for radius 4 Radius point number or pick point select a point 5 Curve direction Left lt Right gt Press Enter 6 Pick End of Arc or point number U Undo Enter to end select a point 7 Pick point or point numbers R Radius Pt U Undo Enter to end select a point 8 Pick point or point numbers R Radius Pt U Undo Enter to end Press Enter A complete report is generated 9 Pick area label centering point select a point 10 Erase Polyline Yes No lt Yes gt Press Enter This option allows you to keep the polyline you have created on the screen Prerequisite None Keyboard Command invarea Area by Lines and Arcs Function This command allows you to calculate the area of a perimeter or lot defined by lines arcs or polylines The default settings fo
128. amp Intersections command or with the standard Offset command The layer names of the offset polylines must match the layer names set in the dialog To run this command pick a set of polylines and point on roadway centerline where the cul de sac center is For cul de sacs with an offset center pick a projection of that center onto the centerline and specify an offset distance positive value is offset to the right negative to the left Like the Offsets and Intersections command a preview Chapter 12 Layout Commands 222 1s shown of the cul de sac being designed Any of the cul de sac parameters may be modified and reviewed before the cul de sac is applied and the drawing is modified with the Finish 2D button Bend cul de sacs are created by selecting offset entities on one side of the centerline 4 Design Cul de Sac vn SEWER p o lal x Offset UE Tear Drop Mode Set Back Hadiuses Layer Draw Dutside Fillet foo fso ROW Pick poo so L B j Pik E Imm Y O B e E Mouse Drag Action Zoom Pan Finish 2D Finish 3D Cancel Help Prompts Select all offset polylines to end with cul de sac Select objects make selections Keyboard Command stdcul Prerequisite A set of offset polylines and roadway centerlines 4 Sided Building Function Often only two sides of a building are surveyed in the field This routine completes the building by drawing th
129. and exporting of pre defined and user at tributes This option is detailed further in the General section of this manual MS Excel Tab This tab contains options and settings for exporting the report to MS Excel Edit Process Raw File 103 Report MS Excel ImporyExport 8 New Current 0 Existing File C Documents and Settings bhensley My Documents My Documents excel AimsQuery xls Pe ee 1 Col 1 Mirror Output There are options to export to a New Current or Existingexcel file The New option will create a new excel file and will begin populating the file at the Starting Row and Column specified The Current option will export the data to the current open excel file and willbegin populating the file at the starting row and column specified The Existing option will export the data to an existing excel file and will beginpopulating the file at the starting row and column specified If exporting to a New or Existing MS Excel file a file name needs to be specified or selected To specify the name of the Sheet for exporting to within the MS Excel spreadsheet type the name of the sheet in the sheet field The Start Row and Col tells the export routine where to start populating the specified MS Excel file The Mirror Outputoption organizes the data exported in rows instead of columns TheInclude Text Lines option exports the header information and the closure information to the MS Excel file Exportto Excel
130. andard file extension are listed here Some Sample File Formats are listed at the end of this section C amp G CGR RAW TXT x CalTrans DMP Carlson RW5 Fieldbook FBK From Softdesk or Land Development Desktop Geodimeter OBS RAW job LandXML XML Leica GSI RAW GRE This reads the Leica raw file in Wildsoft Liscad 10 20 30 40 C amp G or GeoComp format There are options to specify direct reverse shot order if any and to convert from International Feet to Leica US Feet Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 84 Leica Data Format Conversion Direct Reverse Order Coding system 2 BFFB O Wildsott C 310 20 30 40 BFBF L L KEY LIS B Backsight O GeoComp F Foresight 3 Liscad Leica US Feet Cancel Maptech FLD MDL Laser CDS Nikon TRN RAW PC Cogo BAT SDMS prj SMI RAW Sokkia SDR SDR RAW x SurvCOGO RAW or TXT Survis RAW TDS RW5 RAW Topcon raw x Trimble dc 3TAS TXT Zeiss DAT Export These routines convert the Carlson raw data RW5 file to other formats The following file formats are supported Cal Trans DMP Fieldbook FBK This export routine provides an option to Setup Fieldbook Codes This allows the user to substitute the raw description contained in the rw3 file with the fieldbook code used in AutoDesk Land Desktop Edit Process Raw File 85 Substitution Fieldbook Codes Haw Description Fieldbook Cod
131. appears if description prompting is turned on To locate a point in the coordinate file point number 3 in this example In the Draw Locate Point dialog box choose Draw Range e Point numbers to draw 3 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description Chapter 7 Point Commands 174 3 4154 28 4147 35 0 00 e Point numbers to draw 1 2 Locates a range of points From to 2 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 1 4252 76 4158 32 0 00 RADPT 2 4258 11 4059 38 0 00 e Point numbers to draw Press Enter This ends the command Keyboard Command LPOINT Pick Intersection Points Function This command creates points at line or polyline intersections The object snap is automatically set to intersection or alternatively Apparent Intersection This command is similar to the Draw Locate Points command with an additional check to see if an intersection exists at the picked point If there is no intersection or interior polyline vertex at the point no point is created Pick Intersection Points Symbol Name SPT10 Select Symbol x Point Prompt Settings e Prompt for Descriptions e Prompt for Elevations Locate on Real Z Axis Point Number Settings Point Numbers Automatic Point Numbering Starting Point Number Layer Mare for Points PHTS In the Pick Intersections dialog box you must set parameters for the point e Symbol Name This field displays the symbol nam
132. averses with any amount of redundancy The raw data can contain any combination of traverse angle and distance triangulation angle only and trilateration distance only measurements It can also calculate resections where any combination of distances and angles can be measured from an unknown point to known points points located in the traverse The raw data need not be in linear format and individual traverses do not have to be defined using any special codes All measurements will be used in the adjustment The NLSA program also adjusts both 3D and 2D traverses This includes 3D traverses that contain some 2D data If you have Vertical Adjustment turned ON in the project settings elevations will be calculated and adjusted only if there 1s enough information in the raw data file to do so Least squares adjustment is used for elevation adjustment as well as the horizontal adjustment To compute elevations the instrument record must have a HI and the foresight record must have a rod height slope distance and vertical angle A 0 0 zero HI or ROD HEIGHT is valid only when the field is blank will it be considered a 2D measurement A 3D traverse must also have adequate elevation control in order to process the elevations Elevation control can be obtained from the Control File Coordinate records in the raw data file or Elevation records in the raw data file The NLSA program can also automatically reduce field measurements to State Plane coordina
133. aw data editor to review and edit the raw data Since the tutorial example should have converged we will next review the reports generated by the least squares adjustment Press the Report button at the bottom of the window to review the results of the Least Squares adjustment Chapter 2 Tutorials 52 Network Least Squares Results Main Report Unadjusted Obs Adjusted Obs Sideshots Vertical Coordinates Fri Jan 30 11 25 45 2004 Raw File C LSTutorial fixedLsTutoiral rw5 Coordinate File C Land Projects 34 Tutoriall cogo points mdb Curvature retraction correction OW Maximum iterations 10 Convergence Limit 0 001000 1953 State Plane Coordinates zone 3200 North Carolina Elevations factor computed from raw data elevations Elevation Units US Feet Horizontal Units Meters Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 503 Bat S501 Far 507 Lows 211 542 35 0 Haigh z11 55 z0 D Parr 000 lt 00 44 0 ingle spread exceeds tolerance pee Se Bar Hg Ret ss Low 215 11 57 0 High 215 12 20 0 Diff O00 O00 z3 0 Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 508 Ba S503 Fa 508 Low 151 23 02 0 High 151 23 51 0 Diff 000 00 49 0 Report Inverse Relative Error Ellipse Draw Error Ellipses Exit zi Relative Error Ellipses Relative error ellipses are a statistical measure of the expected error between two points Regular error ellipses are a measure of the absolute error of a single point Some survey accuracy stan
134. ble of the coordinate data of the points from the current coordinate CRD file or from the screen The command displays the dialog shown below for setting the point table options At the top of the dialog enter the range of point numbers to label You can also specify the order and format of the table columns To not include a data type set the Sequence number to blank Prompts Point Table Dialog Building Data List Done Adjoiner Text 237 Table Upper Left Corner pick a point Generating Table Done Point Generator c scadxml data mantopo crd Point Range 10 20 i pui 0 ee 3 00509 e Head Wilh ls Pre Emme A Elevation 4 ELEVATION B J Description E esceemw Je Jf m O o o og i E Plot ColumnNames E ae M Flat Grid Lines le E TewHeit aam Space Between Columns m Interline Scale cum s 1 4814573 4926 339 10 08 17 Typical Point Table Keyboard Command pointtbl Prerequisite Coordinates Chapter 14 Survey Text Commands 238 Polyline Commands is 2D Polyline Function In addition to the regular AutoCAD Draw Polyline command PL there is the Carlson command that has several options Polyline 2D Options e Show options an startup Lise current drawing layer Layer Auta Zaam mode Never Proximity C Always Proximity Zoom Level g
135. cement options if necessary Symbol Name The name of the symbol file is displayed here Choose a different symbol by clicking Select The selected point symbol is displayed on the right Symbol Rotation Azimuth The rotation angle used for the point symbols used in a counterclockwise direc tion relative to the current twist screen Layer by Desc Inserts the points in the layer named by the point description Using Layer by Desc organizes the points by description and allows for layer management You can use the Isolate Layers command to show only points on a certain layer If you include an invalid layer character in the description the layer name stops at the bad character e g a point description of UP 105 would use layer UP The Layer Prefix is added to the beginning of the layer name e g a Layer Prefix of PT_ and a point with the description EP would use the layer PT_EP Layer Prefix is optional It allows all the point layers to be grouped Draw Nodes Only Inserts only a point entity the node and not the point block and symbol This option is most useful when you have a lot of points to insert because inserting only the nodes alone is faster than inserting nodes with the point block and symbol Commands such as Triangulate amp Contour and Make 3D Grid File can use these points and do not need the point block and symbol Chapter 7 Point Commands 172 Elevation Text Only Draws text of the point elevation without the poin
136. ch will remain visible during and after viewport changes See illustration under Densify Polyline Vertices in this manual Prompts 1 Select polylines to draw blips 2 Select objects select polyline s Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command plblip File Name sp poly3d arx Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 250 Reverse Polyline Function This command reverses the order of the line and or arc segments of a polyline e Reverse Polyline can be used in conjunction with commands such as Station Polyline Centerline and Profile from Surface Entities since the polyline must be plotted in the direction of increasing stations e If it is more convenient to draft a polyline in one direction you may do so and then use the Reverse Polyline command to change its order e This command can also be used to reverse a 3D Polyline Breakline or a 3D Pad Template Temporary arrows are drawn along the polyline to graphically show the new polyline direction Prompts 1 Select the Polyline to Reverse pick point on polyline Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command REVPLINE Reduce Polyline Vertices Function This command removes points from a polyline without significantly changing the polyline The offset cutoff 1s the maximum distance that the polyline can move when you remove a point e g in a polyline with three points in a straight line the middle point can be removed without changing the polyline Prompts 1 Enter the offse
137. cision for bearings as well as the symbols used Turn on off the toggles for degrees minutes and seconds to control the precision e g if you wish to round to the nearest minute simply clear the toggle from the second field For each field degrees minutes seconds you can supply the character or word to be used You can quickly fill in these fields with the two buttons to the right of each field 2 Line Establish the terms used when the course of a call is a line segment Supply the beginning and ending terms for these line calls Line 5egment 5pecs E4 Cancel Help 3 Distance This dialog box is used to establish the terms and precision used when creating a distance for the course of a call The precision and suffix apply to curves as well Choose the desired distance precision from the window and supply the beginning and ending terms for the line calls Chapter 9 Deed Commands 200 Distance Specs x Fidis Primary Units Feet Precision St Alternate Units Meters Precision Sule e Report Secondary Units Cancel Help If you would like to report dual distances such as feet metric turn ON the toggle in the lower left corner of the dialog box The primary units are set in the Settings menu Drawing Setup e g if you have English as your default unit the alternate will be metric etc 4 Curve Establish the terms and options used when creating the course of a
138. click OK GIF 10 communication settings The upload and download file transfer works with the GIF 10 data collector The GIF 10 communication settings should be the following e Baud 9600 e Parity NONE e Protocol NONE Data Collectors 69 e Stop Bit 1 e End Mark CR LF Connected As some computers use DCE and others use DTE Downloading GIF 10 1 From the GIF 10 go to the file transfer command 2 Go to CSD Run the Data Collection and choose Leica Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 3 Select the Download button Within 10 seconds go back to GIF 10 and select the file to send 4 When the transfer 1s complete the program will ask you to create a CSD coordinate file if you haven t already specified a file name Uploading GIF 10 1 From the GIF 10 data collector go to the file transfer command 2 Go to CSD Run the Data Collection and choose Leica 3 In the CSD dialog specify the job name in the Leica File field 4 Choose the Select File button next to the CSD coordinate File edit box and choose the coordinate file to send Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 5 Select the Upload button A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload 6 Before clicking the OK button for range of points go to GIF 10 and start the receive by highlighting Receive and pressing the Run button 7 The GIF 10 now shows the available job numbers Choose a job to recei
139. coding are as follows Chapter 5 Field to Finish 150 TE Places a node and or line per the field code library TC Places a node and or line per the field code library IC opecifles a point on a curve TC opecifles a point on a curve E stops the lina TE otops the line TC Closes the line back to the starting point TC Closes the line back to the starting point TOR Typically coded on the third corner af a rectangle to close the figure with having to locate the fourth corner TF Typically coded on the third corner of a rectangle to close the figure with having to locate the fourth corner WANT Places anode as specified by the code VW in the field code library and then begins a line as specified by code W in the field code library TC ERE Results in three lines coming together TCT TC2 T C3 Results in three lines coming together All three lines are specified bythe definition of the single code T C in the field code library TE TES When used in conjunction with the Draw Field Codes Without a Suffix as Points Only toggle TC will be recognized as the node and T CT will be recognized as the line so that if the code TC in the field code libraryis defined as a polyline Ine or 3D polyline duplicate lines will not be unintentianally placed when this shot only pertains to a single element Keep in mind that all line work must have a numeric suffix when using this toggle TREE OAK Result an screen would be TREE OAK TREE O
140. command under the Process menu The SurvNET program simultaneously adjusts a network of interconnected traverses with any amount of re dundancy The raw data can contain any combination of traverse angle and distance triangulation angle only and trilateration distance only measurements It can also calculate resections where any combination of distances and angles can be measured from an unknown point to known points points located in the traverse The raw data need not be in linear format and individual traverses do not have to be defined using any special codes All measurements will be used in the adjustment The SurvNET program adjusts both 3D and 2D traverses This includes 3D traverses that contain some 2D data If you have Vertical Adjustment turned ON in the project settings elevations will be calculated and adjusted only if there 1s enough information in the raw data file to do so Least squares adjustment is used for elevation adjustment as well as the horizontal adjustment To compute elevations the instrument record must have a HI and the foresight record must have a rod height slope distance and vertical angle A 0 0 zero HI or ROD HEIGHT is valid only when the field is blank will it be considered a 2D measurement A 3D traverse must also have adequate elevation control in order to process the elevations Elevation control can be obtained from the Control File Coordinate records in the raw data file or Elevation records in
141. cription Records This option controls the visibility of the Description records contained in a rw5 file The description record is an additional note used to store useful information in addition to typical point data Sometimes these records clutter the raw file and make it hard to review actual survey data The ability to control the description Edit Process Raw File 95 record visibility is a useful tool when reviewing survey data Show Description Records This option shows unhides description records contained in the rw5 file Hide Record Headers This option hides the in line headers such as the PntNo OcPt FsPt etc The editor contains Smart Headers that changes with the type of data that is in the active row These headers are not in line and are always displayed at the top of the editor Figure 2D shows the editor with the record headers hidden and the Smart Header active Row 21 contains the active cell the automatic header at the top of the editor shows traverse TR record headers Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C Scad2005 Data Drawine1 crd ox File Edit Display Add Process Compute Pts Tools Help NERO Code HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 START 5100 0000 4900 0000 100 0000 21 0 0000 6 000 2 AR vw 133 5330 711 320 Lm IPF Disturbed moved Condition poor 6 000 100 Figure 2D Add Menu Add Traverse SideShot BackSight Instrument Height
142. curve Basic options include beginning and ending terms and the words for left and right if chosen In the large table of curve options select the items you wish to report in the order you want them to appear by placing a number in the sequence field indicating the desired order Make sure you do not enter duplicate numbers Curve Segment Specs E General Beg End Left Right right Curve Options SeqH Pretix Suffix Left Right Concave Brg Arc Length Radius Length with a chord length af with a delta angle of in to the radius point out to the end of curve k Cancel Chord Length Delta Angle _ Chord Bearing m _ Radial In Out 5 Pt Description In the process of following the polyline definition for a boundary the Legal Description Writer can look for descriptions of the points at the endpoints of the polyline These can be extracted by setting the data source to the corresponding point from the coordinate file meaning the points do not have to be plotted on the screen A second option is Point Block With Point Block the command reads the information from the drawing instead of a coordinate file Legal Description 201 Descriptions Specs Data Source CAD Fie e Point Black C None Unknown 0 E Cancel Help Data Source Choose the source for the point data either the current point database point blocks from in the drawing or none Prefix General term a
143. d TOPB where one description ended and another began creating a gap Gaps like these can be quickly closed using the command Join Nearest under Polyline Tools Before using the command it s a good idea to measure the gap You can use AutoCAD s Distance command and snap to the endpoints or for the true 2D distance use CSD s Inverse command To locate the Inverse command select Survey then COGO then Inverse The prompting is Traverse SideShot Options Arc Pick point or point number Pick one side of the gap Chapter 2 Tutorials 32 Northing Y Easting X Elev Z 4078 95 4537 39 15 32 Traverse SideShot Options Arc Pick point or point number Pick the other side of gap Northing Y Easting X Elev Z 4141 59 4589 89 14 48 Bearing N 39d58 01 E Horizontal Distance 81 7397854 Traverse SideShot Options Arc Pick point or point number Enter to end NOTE Inverse is very handy You can Inverse from point numbers e g 169 to 168 in this case or by picking or by a combination of picking and point numbers If you do not know where point 52 is Inverse to it and you will rubber band from it immediately So the gap in question is about 82 units Join Nearest Now that you know the gap to close is just under 82 units feet in this case select Join Nearest under Polyline tools and enter a tolerance of 82 or less and that the endpoints may be different elevations as shown here Join Mearest Options A Mas separation to join
144. d angle By default Ortho is turned on for the second point Press the F8 key to toggle Ortho off Output File Used to designate the output text file This file can then be brought into your word processor and edited Note that the appearance of the output file can be affected by the status of the Use Paragraph Format toggle Settings Group Buttons in the Settings group initiate additional options that are explained in detail in the following sections 1 Bearing This option is used to establish the appearance of the bearings that are drawn with the description Legal Description 199 Bearing Specs Bearing Format Quad Words ward Quads Morth South Wes Degree po Deg x DEGREES Minute po lt Min lt MINUTES pu Sec SECONDS Use Secondary Deflection Angles Cancel Help Bearing Format Designates the character or word used in each bearing direction Standard values are the letters N S E or W One possible option is the entire words NORTH SOUTH EAST and WEST Keep in mind that spaces must be included If you don t enter a space after N S and before E W a space will not be formatted into the bearing Words Quads For bearings that are due NORTH the default is to generate N 00 00 00 E If the 1 Word Quads toggle is turned on the program will substitute the single word which you can change for the direction usually NORTH or DUE NORTH Symbols Designates the pre
145. d pan as you desire in response Now that you have a longer dashed line for the north road edge use the standard AutoCAD Offset command to offset 30 units to the south Now select Join Nearest and tolerate a 31 unit gap and require matching endpoint elevations and directly connect the endpoints These controls prevent you from joining the wrong gaps other polylines with bigger gaps or different endpoint elevations It is best to constrain your join effort as tight as possible in case you inadvertently select the wrong thing Chapter 2 Tutorials 34 Join Nearest Options Max separation to join Connection Method Q Average Endpoints Together 5 Directly Connect Endpoints C3 Fillet With Radius Zero e Convert lines into polylines Join only identical layers Now you have a closed figure you can hatch Try hatching with the dots pattern at 100 scale and you obtain the following Remove the end segments of the road to make the drawing more appealing by a repeat use of the command Remove Polyline Segment option Break Extend by Distance by Direction and With Close The simplest use of Extend by Distance is selecting how far to extend on the screen More advanced usage involves changing direction and closing the figure If we thaw back the point numbers layer O or as you assigned them you will note the point plot in the vicinity of our two light poles Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 35 0 00 LP 5 0 00 N
146. d upon the coordinates of the points contained in the point database For example 1f the raw data has been processed using the compass rule adjustment method the points in the crd file are now adjusted However the raw data remains unchanged If a record of the rw5 file reflecting the angles and distances between the points after an adjustment has been ran is desired this routine can be run thus updating the raw data to reflect the adjusted angles and distances Another application for this routine is that of building a rw5 file for future processing and adjustment For example if a point file or text file has been received from another engineering firm or fellow surveyor and you would like to build a rw5 file for future reference and processing this this option can also be used to accomplish this The rw5 file would be set up with the occupied points foresight points and the desired angle type to use specified for the traverse This would be all the manual entry of the data necessary After creating the shell of the traverse then run the update raw from points routine and the raw data as contained in the coordinate file will be imported into the rw5 file thus filling out the horizontal angle distance and vertical components specified Find Bad Angle This routine prompts for another raw data RW5 file which is read and the data added to the end of the existing raw data RW5 file For example if you are editing the raw file from the first days work
147. dards such as the ALTA standards state the maximum allowable error between any two points in a survey Relative error ellipses can give you this information Press the Relative Error Ellipse button and enter 514 and 503 in the From Pt and To Pt fields Press Calculate The dialog box should look as follows Relative Error Ellipse Fram Paint To Point Semimajor 0 06 a 0 02 Mas Err amp z 5 55 5176 9 E At the 95 confidence level there should only be around 06 meters of error between points 514 and 503 If you need to compute relative error ellipses for sideshots make sure the Enable sideshots for error ellipse toggle is set in the Settings dialog box Lesson Four Review of the Least Squares Report Step 10 After pressing the Report button from the previous dialog box the least squares report is displayed In this lesson the different sections of the least squares report are explained To save the report to an ASCII text file use the File Save As menu option Network Least Squares De SurvCADD Edit c scadxml2 USER scadrprt tmp AE File Edit Settings a SA Open Save Print Exit 01 19 2004 09 35 Mon Jan 19 09 25 15 2004 Raw File c Xscadxml12XUSERXtmp rvr5 Coordinate File C XLSTUTORIALXLSTUTORIAL CRD Curvature refraction correction OH Maximum iterations 10 Convergence Limit 0 001000 1983 State Plane Coordinates zone 3200 Horth Carolina Elevations factor computed from raw data elevations Elevation Un
148. dividually one sequence definition can store these descriptions in order Then just the sequence code such as RD is used in the field The cross section can be shot in left right then left right order right left then right left order or alternating left right then right left order the alternating method is known as Zorro style However shots must always start from a right or left edge 1 To set up a sequence choose the Sequence toggle in the Edit Code dialog 2 Select the Define Code Sequence button This brings up a dialog for entering the sequence codes in order 3 Sequence codes should be defined as normal codes somewhere else in the Field to Finish code table e g SHD as a 3D polyline Define Code Sequence Ea Order of Shots Code 1 SHD 1 10 o Code 2 2 8 12 Code 3 3 8 13 Cade 4 4 7 14 Code 5 5 E 15 Code E Code 7 Code 6 Code 3 Code 10 Code 11 Code 12 M Zorro Style 1 Cancel Help The illustration below demonstrates usage of a sequence code Ehe 3159 114 115 P C F le 1 104 1 f EF L E lt H In the field this template code is used for all the cross section shots 1 e RD for all the points Later Field to Finish will substitute this template code with the sequence codes 1 e substitute RD with SHD Field to Finish 161 Symbol Points For each code definition the symbol insertion points can be defined with up to three points To define the symbol i
149. dows Start menu to open the Windows Control Panel Jason DiPinto ia Internet My Documents Internet Explorer 44 My Recent Documents paimk 7 My Pictures Microsoft ward p My Music z My Computer E Control Panel Microsoft Access a E Mozilla a E Set Program Access and Defaults k Autodesk Land Enabled Map gt ON 2004 ES Printers and Faxes Microsoft Excel 12 Help and Support jJ Search All Programs gt 17 Run Fe Log OFF o Shut Down E SquirrelMail 1 2 8 Mi 2 From the Control Panel select Add Remove Programs Installing Carlson Survey Desktop 7 Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp Back 57 ya Search ie Folders 535 E Address B Control Panel BEN Y Go vi Control Panel gt Pick a category Switch to Classic View E Appearance and Themes A Printers and Other Hardware See Also mr Ay Windows Update at Network and Internet ti User A t 9 Help and Support i etwork and Internet Connections ser Accounts o Other Control Panel LI Options Ea A RS Date Time Language and Regional ue Options Install or remove programs and Windows components P Sounds Speech and Audio Devices Accessibility Options y Performance and Maintenance 3 Add Remove Programs generates a list of programs available for uninstall Select Carlson Survey Desk top ES Add or Remove Programs Currently installed programs
150. e Pick Intersection Points 175 e Select Symbol This allows you to select a new symbol type The symbol is displayed to the right Point Prompt Settings Prompt for Descriptions You are prompted for point description Prompt for Elevations You are prompted for elevation Locate on Real Z Axis The point uses the elevation of the intersected lines Point Number Settings Point Numbers Assigns point numbers to the created points Automatic Point Numbering Numbers the new points automatically You will be prompted for point num bers if the option is not checked e Starting Point Number Sets the starting point number for automatic point numbering Layer Name for Points Allows you to assign a layer for the points 1 APParent intersection on Yes No Press Enter 2 app on Pick Intersection Point pick an intersection NOTE Apparent Intersection object snap lets you select theoretical intersections e g twolines that cross in plan view but that are at different elevations For more information on object snaps see the Object Snap command in the Settings section of this manual Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PICKINT Bearing Bearing Intersect Function This command creates a point at the intersection of two lines You can define a line by picking two points selecting a line or typing in a bearing After the lines are defined a point symbol is located at the point of intersection Prompts 1 Cl
151. e EDGP BRKL IPF C3 FL DOT OBS GPS Data TXT x Land XML XML MOSS MOS SDMS PRJ This export routine provides an option to Setup SDMS Codes This allows the user to substitute the raw description contained in the rw5 file with the SDMS codes used in SDMS program Substitution SDMS Codes Haw Description SDMS Code PT PN HI IH OF PO EP a Sokkia SDR TDS RW5 RAW VA Dot TOP Open Settings This option allows for defining codes that represent the closing shot and angle balance shot of a traverse These codes can be entered in the description of a point while in the field When the rw5 is opened in the raw file editor the measurement data containing the closing shot code will be set to a CL record and the measurement data containing the angle balance code will be set to an AB record This allows for quick processing of the survey data and saves the time spent setting up the file for processing Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 86 Open Settings Closing Shot Description Match r IL CLOSURE Le Angle Balance Description Match IANGBAL L Print Settings Provides control of various options for printing the rw5 file in theStandard Report Viewer Print Settings Report Description Records Use Degree Symbols In Angles Use Decimal Degrees For Lat Lon g Use Decimal Seconds For Direct Reverse Report Exit Exits the raw file editor Edit Menu
152. e 0 042 Warning Vertical distance between 2 and 3 exceeds tolerance Low Vert Distance 6 612 High Vert Distance 8 357 Difference 1 745 Warning Vertical distance between 3 and 4 exceeds tolerance Low Vert Distance 11 459 High Vert Distance 11 516 Difference 0 057 Warning Vertical distance between 4 and 5 exceeds tolerance Low Vert Distance 4 340 High Vert Distance 4 375 Difference 0 035 Warning Horizontal distance between 12 and 3 exceeds tolerance Low Distance 144 641 High Distance 144 661 Difference 0 020 HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT Control Coordinates 1 Cbserrations ota H E Str H StEmE 1 1 Orta 10000 000 0 001 0 001 Distances 14 Observations FromSta Tosta Dit 1 5 220 45 1 Z 292 214 2 6 53 388 E 3 324 186 3 4 215 803 3 20 134 663 20 21 116 073 al 2d 50 115 4 5 309 647 5 10 129 255 10 11 126 01 10 15 10 11 12 129 426 12 3 144651 Angles 15 Observations Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 140 otErr 0 0116 0 0118 0 0124 0 0113 0 0115 0 0147 0 0146 0 0144 0 0118 0 0126 0 0125 0 0142 0 0126 0 0126 Azimuths 1 Observations Occ Sta FS Sta Hearing 1 2 Adjusted Coordinates Adjusted Local Coordinates Adjusted Coordinates Error Ellipses 95 CI Bo sta bd LO bo bi e X5 ce ln la pL StErr Sec M 45 00 D0 E 5 E Angle 109 1913 190 3206 O96 03 52 122 0353 185 2356 150 1526 183 4645 093 0212 039 2640 241
153. e other two sides 4 Sided Building creates a parallelogram given two connecting lines or given a polyline with two segments With two lines there is an option to make the parallelogram as a polyline or as four lines Prompts Options Pick a line or polyline gt pick a line Pick another side Enter for none pick a line Convert the lines into a polyline lt Yes gt No press Enter Options lt Pick a line or polyline gt press Enter Entering O for options lets you choose whether or not to be prompted to set the new polyline width 4 Sided Building 223 Before After Keyboard Command 4sided Prerequisite A polyline with two segments or two adjoining lines Parking Function This command draws a series of parking stalls or equilateral lot lines The command prompts for stall width stall parking angle side for stalls and stall depth Stalls can be located by the number of stalls in a direction as many as fit between two points or along a polyline Parking Settings X Stall width Stall Length Angle of Parking dd mmss Side for Stalls C Left f Right C Both Stall Location Method Number of Stalls Between Paints C Along Palyline Cancel Help Prompts Parking Settings dialog make selections Starting point pick a point Pick point or point number Ending point Pick point or point number pick a point Created 58 stalls Keyboard Command parking Prerequi
154. e of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion 1s also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Topcon The various Topcon instruments in this list can be downloaded directly from the instrument to Carlson Software using the appropriate cable supplied by Topcon The cable has a round end to connect to the Topcon instrument and a 9 pin serial port end to connect to the PC This download is commonly used for example by companies who collect data and store the data onboard the instrument itself with no 3rd party handheld data collector involved This is a fairly common practice for example in construction stakeout The procedure outlined below is for the Topcon GTS 226 which has a 4 button keyboard F1 through F4 Chapter 3 Data Collectors 74 providing access to all onboard commands and even allowing direct multi keystroke entry of coordinates Most Topcon instruments follow similar procedure Uploading Upload Procedure PC to Topcon At the main menu you will see the following options e Fl DATA COLLECT e F2 LAYOUT e F3 MEMORY MANAGER Press the F3 key twice paging down to DATA TRANSFER Then select COMM PARAMETERS F3 Protocol must be ONE WAY BAUD RATE 9600 and CHAR PARITY must be 8 NONE NOTE This is a one time process Once the protocols are ve
155. e points are created in the specified distinct point layer e g DRIVEWAY for linework and DRIVEWAY PNT for the points Entity Type 3D and 2D Allows polylines to be drawn as both 3D and 2D When selected the Ad ditional 2D Polyline Layer option near the top of the standard Edit dialog allows you to place the 2D polyline on a different layer than the 3D polyline A curved polyline coded with the PC or equivalent Start Curve code would plot with a true arc for the 2D polyline and with a series of 3D interpolated vertices through the arc in the case of the 3D polyline Chapter 5 Field to Finish 154 e Add New code definition is inserted in the list in the position after the one currently selected If none are selected for positioning the new code is placed at the top Only one code definition may be highlighted before running this command e Copy Copy command requires that you first select and highlight a single code It will capture all the settings in the standard Edit dialog but leave the code name blank requiring entry of a new code name Copy might be used to add a new IPF iron pin found by borrowing from IP changing nothing but the symbol as shown below Edit Field Code Definition Category Iw Processing ON Sequence Companion Codes Code IPF Description 1 Use Code Set Linetype Set Symbol Symbol Pts Set Color Unit Symbol CONTINUOUS SPTS Text Size Symbol Size 0 080 0 000
156. ecify the number assigned to the first point Layer for Points Specify the layer for points Auto Zoom The screen view will zoom center to the new point when it is drawn This is useful for keeping the display centered to the current working area Use Field to Finish Table Allows you to use the code definitions from Field to Finish for the point symbols and or layers when creating new points with commands such as Traverse e g when creating a point with description EP with both For Symbols and For Layers toggled ON the command will look up EP in the Field to Finish table and will use the symbol and layer defined in this code table instead of the symbol and layer set in Point Defaults Set Table Select the Field to Finish FLD code table file for layer and symbols definitions for the above options Prerequisites None Keyboard Command CONFIG_SCAD Configure Carlson Survey Desktop 269 Chapter 19 Configure Carlson Survey Desktop 270 Help About Carlson Survey Desktop Function Displays the Carlson Survey Desktop version number serial number license information and copyright information You can run the registration wizard by clicking the Change Registration button on this dialog Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ABOUT_SCAD OnLine Help Function This command opens the Carlson Survey Desktop on line Help File Prerequisite None Keyboard Command F1 or HELP Technical Support D
157. ect 180 Bearing Distance Intersect 181 Blips 226 Boundary 237 Break 40 45 190 228 Breakline 145 by Closed Polyline 227 by Distance 3 43 46 220 Calculate Offsets 247 Centerline 246 249 252 Chord Bearing 206 Closure 3 206 259 Closure Error 230 COGO Tools 243 Compass 55 Configure Carlson Survey Desktop 20 Convert 93 97 195 218 Convert Points 194 Coordinate File 85 88 253 271 Coordinate File Utilities 167 Crandall 2 Create Points from Entities 191 Custom 248 Cut Sheet 250 Cut Sheet 253 254 Data Collectors 80 Data Collecto 53 80 106 112 Data Collectors 79 Deed Commands 203 Deed Description 204 Definition 139 143 156 Densify Polyline Vertices 225 Design 209 211 253 Discussion Groups 290 Distance Distance Intersect 183 Divide Along Entity 188 Divide Between Points 187 Draw 19 59 133 145 147 148 165 168 177 208 241 248 Draw Polyline Blips 226 Drawing Setup 145 181 182 187 212 Draw Locate Points 164 Eagle Point 140 Earth Curvature 123 127 260 Edit 17 34 36 64 108 112 114 115 117 132 143 147 157 158 208 262 275 Edit Symbol Library 200 Edit Least Squares Settings 261 Edit Process Raw File 106 Edit Process Raw File 105 Elevation 23 118 121 122 125 128 166 168 176 178 179 188 190 192 205 206 251 253 258 266 271 279 286 Elevation Difference 22 Enter Deed Descripti
158. elation file is dcf When executing the program you have the option of using an existing file or creating a new file for the deed correlation Exit This button end the routine Help This button displays the help topics relating to the Deed Correlation routine Edit Points survey Point Deed Point After specifying the hold and rotation points the deed correlation report will display again showing the bearing and distace of each side of the tract description Chapter 9 Deed Commands 196 SurvCADD Edit C scad2006new USER scadrprt tmp a ui s P Open Save Print Exit Find somen Hide Deed Correlation Report 2 23 2005 14 11 Survey Points Deed Points From 6 From 1 To Point Bearing Distance S To Point Bearing Distance N62 41 33 E 478 353 2 N62 38 22 E 481 363 N87 21 09 E 784 656 3 NB7 16 09 E 787 390 569 32 02 E 919 915 i 4 S69 41 0S E 921 341 S28 24 42 E 597 129 5 S28 42 56 E 597 605 Survey Points Deed Points From 7 From 2 To Point Bearing Distance To Point Bearing Distance 5 62 41 33 W 478 353 1 1 S 62 38 22 W 481 363 562 56 56 E 402 846 3 562 53 55 E 403 259 538 54 44 E 695 407 4 S38 S3 41 E 695 218 10 s10 42 59 W 757 876 5 s10 40 01 W 758 444 Survey Points Deed Points From 8 From 3 Check Deed Rotation Hald Prot Point File Edit Settings pil Al Q a e Open Save Print Exit d Screen Check Deed Rotation Report 2 24 2005 14 34 Hold Pivot Point Survey 6 Deed 1 Rotation
159. eld Make sure the communication parameters in CSD are set to the following e Baud 9600 e Parity NONE Receiving a Raw data File from CGField 1 In CGField select the UTILS menu and choose C amp G Transfer 2 Select Send Raw Data 3 In CSD leave the FILE fields blank Press the Download Raw button to ready CSD to receive the file 4 In CGField select the raw data file to be sent The transfer will begin The C amp G RAW file will be transferred and saved in the data folder After the transfer is complete you will be asked for the RW5 file name The RAW file will be automatically converted to a Carlson RWS file Receiving a Coordinate File from CGField 1 In CGField select the UTILS menu and choose C amp G Transfer 2 Select Send Coords and choose the Coordinate file to send 3 In CSD leave the FILE fields blank Press the Download Raw button to ready CSD to receive the file 4 In CGField select the points to send for all points to select blocks of points or from a pts file the set of points in a Batch Point File 5 The coordinates will be transferred After the transfer 1s complete you will be asked for the coordinate file name The C amp G CRD file will automatically be converted to a Autodesk Land Desktop coordinate file Receiving an ASCII file from CGField Chapter 3 Data Collectors 64 This will allow you to transfer a C amp G report file RPT or an ASCII NEZ file to CSD 1 In CGField select the UTILS me
160. enter a slope distance from the reference points to the resection 4 You are prompted for additional reference points and parameters 5 In the results dialog box that displays the final coordinates and residuals you can choose to store the coordinates in the current coordinate file with a specified point number Prerequisite 2 or 3 reference points Keyboard Command CRESECTION Point on Arc Function This command creates a Point on an Arc Prompts 1 Define arc by Points lt select arc or polyline gt pick arc or polyline arc segment Pick a point on the arc somewhere near its midpoint The preview arrow points to the 1st endpoint the occupied point Chapter 7 Point Commands 180 2 Precede distance with minus sign if distance from 2nd endpoint Distance along arc from Ist point 100 3 You must enter a distance If the distance is from the Ist endpoint PC the one highlighted by the screen preview arrow use a positive value If the distance 1s from the 2nd endpoint PT use a negative value 4 The command then plots a point at the computed distance Prerequisite Execute Drawing Setup command to set defaults Keyboard Command PTARC Divide Between Points Function This command divides the distance between two points and inserts a point symbol at the specified distance Divide Between Points can also interpolate elevation To interpolate the elevations the points picked must be at their real Z axis elevation
161. er 18 Conversion Commands 266 Configure Carlson Survey 19 Desktop Configure Carlson Survey Desktop Function This command allows you to set the default settings that are used each time you start a new drawing or load an existing drawing These settings are also used in the current project These settings are stored inx ini files in the CSD directory Configure Carlson Survey Desktop E 1 E x General Settings Point Prompt Settings Use Notepad for reports e Descriptions M Use Dyview Twist Angle vw Elevations Date Format windows Setting Prompt for Symbol Hames Coordinate Report Order SPTa Select Symbol f North East C East Morth aangal ame SPT Drawing Scale 50 0 Auto Zoom COGO Setti r seus Symbol Flat Size 0 0400 Drawing Units 2 0000 Generate Report Log mn Text Plot Size 0 0400 Drawing Units 2 0000 Use South Azimut e Point Numbers W Automatic Point Numbers Start Point Mumber Laver for Points FNTS Use Field to Finish For Symbols Eor Layers For Descriptions Instrument and Rod Height e Show Setup on Status Bar Automatic Raw File On ngle Mode Bearing Vertical Angle Mane m Table Mone Set T able Cancel Help 1 General Settings Use Notepad for Reports When this toggle is turned ON any report generated will appear in Windows Notepad instead of the Carlson Report Viewer Use Dview Twist Angle Keeps text horizontal to a twist scree
162. er dialog Data Collectors 61 SurvCE FastSurvey G2 Data Collection Download From SurvLE Coordinates Other Files Upload To Sur CE Coordinates Field To Finish Codes Triangulation Alignment Geoid Other Files Convert PAS To Fieldbook Fort COM 1 Baud Download Coordinates shows a list of the coordinate files on Carlson SurvCE Select a file to download The point data will be stored in the point database for the current Autodesk Land Desktop project Download Other Files shows a list of all the data files on Carlson SurvCE Select a file to download The file will be transferred and stored in the Survey folder for the current Autodesk Land Desktop project The files are transferred in their original form without any conversion Upload Coordinates transfers points from the current Autodesk Land Desktop project to Carlson SurvCE Before running this command you need to supply a name in the Carlson SurvCE File edit box This name is used to name the point file on the Carlson SurvCE collector Upload Triangulation and Alignment features will transfer triangulation surfaces and horizontal alignments from Autodesk Land Desktop to Carlson SurvCE Upload Geoid transfers a portion of the specified geoid to Carlson SurvCE The geoid data files require a large amount of disk space and are not included in the CSD install Instead they are installed separately You can download the install for the latest geoid data files from the Carl
163. es and distances are recorded as DS records and the mean value of the angle and distance is recorded as a SS record DS records are not used in processing CL Closing Shot The closing shot record 1s the traverse record where the foresight point is the closing point for the traverse This record is used by the adjustment commands in the Process menu There should be only one CL record in each Traverse loop Name Record in the raw file If there 1s no CL record the process adjustment routines will prompt for which shot is the closing shot The closing shot can also be define in the field by using special codes defined in the Open Settings found under the File pulldown within the editor Please refer to the Open Settings documentation below for more information on these codes AB Angle Balance The Angle Balance record is the measurement data observed that closes the angles of the traverse Typically this record is the measurement data recorded from the closing shot to the initial backsight point The backsight could be either external or internal to the traverse Angle Balance routine in the Process menu uses this record and compares the angle between the occupied point and foresight point of this record with a user specified reference angle There should be only one AB record in the raw file If there is no AB record then the Angle Balance routine will prompt for which shot to use as the angle balance CL AB Closing Shot and Angle Balance T
164. esson will cover the processing of the raw data Lastly the reports created by the least squares program will be explained The raw data file associated with this tutorial is located in the SurveyDesktop Data folder under LDD installation folder on your computer ex C Program Files VLand Desktop 2004 SurveyDesktop V Data The raw file to be processed is called Tutorial3 rw5 This data comprises a network that is to be reduced to NAD83 grid coordinates The zone used is North Carolina Both direct and reverse angles were collected in the raw file Lesson One Raw data Review and Editing Step 1 Click the icon for Autodesk Autodesk Land Desktop and launch Autodesk Land Desktop You may be Network Least Squares 47 presented with a Startup Wizard dialog box If so click Exit Step 2 The Carlson Survey Desktop CSD menu is titled Survey Under the Survey menu choose Edit Process Raw Data File The Raw File to Process dialog box is displayed Choose the Existing Tab and enter Tutorial3 rw5 Once the correct file name has been entered press the Open button correct Raw File to Process rw5 Existing Recent Folders Save as Data Folder Recently used files File name Tutorials reb Folder CA Documents and settings dipi Size Date 12341 D ata Preview L5 AM1 000 AR0 000 EF OPP PA50 8P45 563 80636 05 0 LS HI3 000 HR DOC EE OPP PA50 BP55 3 0 60686 0530 L5 A1990 000 HR0 000 BF OPS HAI4 BP570
165. f the coordinates are displayed As this project was reduced to NAD 83 the final latitude and longitudes are displayed Error ellipses computed to the 93 percent confidence interval are also displayed Adjusted Coordinates Adjusted Grid Coordinates sta MN E Sterr M StErr E 501 203743 570 786686 053 0 0018 0 0018 303 203088 319 866865 053 0 0018 0 0018 Adjusted Geographic coordinates sta Latitude Longitude Conv Ang Grid Factor 2 Factor Combined Factor 301 35 34 15 46712 N 77 02 46 11932 w 001 07 40 0 99988806 Q 99995887 O 99984693 503 35 34 23 40778 N 77 02 45 92799 w 001 07 40 99988827 0 99995753 O 99984 581 Adjusted Coordinates Error Ellipses 95 CI sta semi Major semi Minor Max Error Az Axis Axis 301 O 005 0 005 N 90 00 00 E 0 005 N 90 00 00 E 303 0 005 Adjusted Measurements The following section from the report shows the final adjusted measurements This section is one of the most important sections to review when analyzing the results of the adjustment In addition to the adjusted measurement the residual is displayed The residual is the amount of adjustment applied to the measurement The residual is computed by subtracting the unadjusted measurement from the adjusted measurement The standard deviation of the measurement 1s also displayed Ideally the computed standard deviation and residual Chapter 2 Tutorials 56 and the standard error displayed in the unadjusted measurement would all be of s
166. file BFFB or BFBF as explained in the dialog box 3 Select the Convert Leica button The command prompts for the input Wild Leica File raw file the output RW5 file and the coordinate file if you have not entered them Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion 1s also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Chapter 3 Data Collectors 70 SDR Sokkia Leitz Data Collection Sokkia SDR Data Collection HA PERA Download Heceree Sokkia Data File Upload Send Coordinates Convert RAM Sokka SDA to HWw5 Convert Hh To Fieldbook Convert Land Desktop Points to Sokkia SDR Send Field To Finish Code Table To Sokkia SDR Receive Sokkia Print File Send Sokkia SDA Data File Include Time Stamps in Haw File Include Point Attributes in Mates Port Parity COM1 C COM2 COCOM3 C COM4 CICOMS C COM6 None Odd Even Baud 5 1200 Co 2400 4800 9600 C 18200 Co 38400 Hun Edit Pracess Aaw File Paint Protect Help This command applies to the Sokkia SDR 20 SDR 22 SDR 31 and SDR 33 as well as other collectors that have SDR format transfer such as the Trimble and C amp G Downloading From the SDR dat
167. file command The Fieldbook conversion is also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Prerequisite None Keyboard Command DATACOLT Data Collectors 65 TDS Data Collection TDS Data Collection TOS File Fort EOM 1 O EOM 2 O EOM 3 Baud C 1200 CQ 2400 C 4800 Parity None Odd O COM 4 6 9600 COM 5 COM B CO 19200 O Even Point Protect Downloading HP 48 and Husky 1 In the TDS program go to the File Transfer command Choose the type of data to transfer CRD or RAW 2 Select the Send function key 3 Stop here on the TDS and go to CSD 4 Select Data Collection and pick TDS Make sure that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 5 Select the Download button CSD will now wait to receive the TDS file 6 Within ten seconds select the file to send on the TDS Downloading Ranger and Windows CE 1 In the TDS program go to the Transfer command and pick the Send File function Set the Connecting To field to HP 48 2 Make sure that the COM port baud rate and parity are set correctly and then select OK 3 In the Type field of the file selection dialog choose Coordinate Files or Raw Files 4 Stop here on the TDS and go to CSD 5 Select Data Collection and pick TDS Make sure that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 6 Select the Download button The CSD program will now wait to receive the TDS file 7 Wit
168. ght the deed name in the Process Deed File dialog box and select the Report button This displays the report in the standard report viewer which you can use to print or save the report The report includes the closure error distance and bearing e Draw Deed Linework Highlight the deed name and pick the Draw button The draw function draws only the lines and curves of the deed e Edit a Deed Highlight the deed name and select the Edit button This brings up a dialog box shown below to edit the deed name and the starting coordinate To edit any of the line or curve data highlight the data row and select the edit button Deed Hame LOT3 Starting Point Northing 5148 3917 Easting 5283 3443 Bearing Distance Type Hadius ArcLen Description H 8 B BB E 188 888 5 1 B BB8 E 188 888 5 Su B BB Y 188 888 H 18 8 BB8 Y 909 600 E dit Add Remove Cancel Help Chapter 9 Deed Commands 194 Selecting the Edit button displays a second Edit Deed dialog box shown below Here you can edit the angle and distance of a line segment or edit the curve parameters of an arc Angle dd mimes 10 0000 C ME C SE C Sw de Nw C AE Distance 33 0000 Line Arc Curve Direction e Lett Right Hadiusg 0 0000 Arc Length 0 0000 Description E Cancel Help Prerequisite None Keyboard Command DEED Deed Correlation Function This command takes a set of field and design deed points
169. gle set of offset codes can be used to offset the polyline a set amount Example 10 500 500 100 EP OH2 5 OV 5 11 525 527 101 EP 12 531 533 103 EP This creates a polyline connecting points 10 11 and 12 and an offset polyline with a 2 5 horizontal and 0 5 vertical offset The direction of the horizontal offset 1s determined by the direction of the polyline A positive horizontal offset goes right from the polyline direction and a negative goes left The horizontal and vertical offset amounts start at the point with the offset codes until a new offset code is found or the end of the polyline Only one horizontal and vertical offset can be applied to 2D polylines For 3D polylines multiple offset codes can be used to make a variable offset Example 10 500 500 100 EP OH2 5 OV 5 11 525 527 101 EP OH5 5 OV 75 12 531 533 103 EP OH7 5 This offsets the first point horizontal 2 5 and vertical 0 5 the second point horizontal 5 5 and vertical 0 75 and the third point horizontal 7 5 and vertical 0 75 A standard single horizontal and vertical offset on a 3D polyline is shown below e SZ Sets a different symbol size The value of the new symbol size is specified after the SZ e g SZ0 2 This value is a size scaler multiplied by the current drawing scale to determine the actual drawn size e g a drawing scale of 50 and a symbol size scaler of 0 2 would make the drawn symbol size 10 ROT Sets t
170. greater than the target area Otherwise the program will increase the frontage until the lot reaches the exact target area The Use Frontage Setback Polyline option allows you to use another polyline besides the actual frontage polyline for the minimum frontage indicator Typically this Frontage Setback Polyline would be offset a set amount from the actual frontage polyline Lot Layout E Target Lot Area 1 000 Area Units So Feet v Acres Minimum Frontage e e ea Minimum Backlot Use Frontage Setback Polyline i Ecol Eemamnder Equally toll Lote e Prompt For Each Lot Area Draw Lots amp s amp Closed Polylines C Side Lines Only Cancel Help Prompts Lot Layout dialog Select front polyline pick a polyline Select back polyline pick a polyline With prompt for each lot active Area remaining 160326 88 S F 3 6806 Acres Quit Frontage Enter lot area Acres lt 1 2269 gt 1 Area remaining 116766 88 S F 2 6806 Acres Quit Frontage Enter lot ara Acres lt 1 0000 gt F Enter Frontage lt 50 00 gt 75 Lot Area 37807 50 S F 0 8679 Acres Area remaining 78959 38 S F 1 8127 Acres Quit Area Enter frontage lt 50 00 gt A Quit Frontage Enter lot area Acres lt 1 0000 gt press Enter Chapter 12 Layout Commands 220 Area remaining 35399 38 S F 0 8127 Acres Quit Frontage Enter lot ara Acres lt 1 0000 gt O el 1 Front Porpl pay Ss l Polylines for Lot Layout The
171. h the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion is also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Geodimeter This transfer routine applies to the Geodimeter Geodat 600 collector Downloading From the Geodimeter data collector go to the file transfer command by pressing the PRG Program key and en tering program 54 Then choose Imem option 1 as the source Next choose the file type to send as either Job measurement data or Area point data The Geodimeter will then prompt for the job name Next enter Serial option 3 as the destination A confirmation screen appears showing the serial port settings Here are some typical settings COM 1 8 0 9600 Before pressing enter ENT key go to CSD and run Data Collection in the Survey menu and choose Geodimeter Then click the Download button and within 15 seconds go back to the Geodimeter and press Enter The file transfer should now go When the transfer is complete the program will ask you for the CSD coordinate file and raw file to create 1f you haven t already specified a file name in the dialog Uploading In CSD run Geodimeter under Data Collection in the Survey menu Pick the Select File button next to the CRD File edit box and choose the coordinate file to send Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly and then click the Upload button A dialog now allows you to spec
172. he Save button The next time that you choose the Report Formatter from the same CSD command it will recall this last format To select another format pull down the list of formats in the left top corner and select which format to use To Delete an unwanted format choose it from the list and then click the Delete button There are several Microsoft Excel export options provided You may specify a spreadsheet file to load before export as well as a left upper cell to start with and sheet number to use Totals which are reported when using built in viewer may be skipped when using Microsoft Excel export Standard Report Viewer Many CSD features display output in the Standard Report Viewer as shown below otandard Report Viewer 19 Carlson Software Edit C Program Files Carlson Software 2002 scadrpre tmp File Edit Settings Open List Points Report 11 30 2002 14 20 File gt c program files carlson software 20021datal examplel crd Job Description Job Humber gt 0 000 Job Date gt 2002 1111 PointHo Horthing Y Easting X Elevi z Description 121 4148 898 8233 421 402 505 TRI FACE 0475 00 L45 33 122 4141 590 8228 742 401 879 TRI FACE 0475 00 L36 65 123 4137 670 8220 233 401 979 TRI FACE 0475 00 L31 99 124 4129 698 8221 129 401 401 TRI FACE 0 75 00 L22 53 125 4127 577 8219 772 399 943 TRI FACE 0 75 00 L20 01 126 4124 575 8217 850 398 321 TRI FACE 0 75 00 L16 45 127 4121 127 8215 643 398 201 TRI FACE 0475 00 L12 35 128
173. he Points pulldown Edit Points and Display Properties From the command line choose S for Selection and when asked Select Civil Points enter All for all points In the Point Display Properties dialog shown below select the color box for the point numbers and change the yellow to the black 7 color as shown below Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 21 E Point Display Properties Text Marker Reset ey on nag E EO nna Color and Visibility Component Visible Number eee eee gee gee gee sees Elevation E 1 AT Description a E Description Type O Raw Full Style and Size Style Standard v Size C5 Relative to Screen Absolute Units Text Size 5 000000 Units 4 sE 51 HL E oum p a a a om onm r i E NEP NC NE NE o Study the point coordinates and descriptions by choosing List Points under the Points menu Select List All Points to bring up the following dialog Chapter 2 Tutorials 22 List Points Printing n Point List 1 2 5 8 10 158 151 284 285 355 O Enable Filtering C Point List Entre Raw Dese Matching Point Groups Include Exclude Summary List Number Northing Easting Elevation Raw Desc FullDesc 4512 06 4639 74 16 96 4305 68 4438 33 20 31 TRAV PT 15 TR amp V PT 15 3975 28 4542 71 0 00 NwEor Nor 3948 7 4534 38 0 00 WSidedOx60 WSide40260 4002 59 4557 85 0 00 LP LP 3835 B 4016 52 0 00 LP LP 4
174. he option is not checked Starting Point Number Sets the starting point number for automatic point numbering 4 Other Settings Layer Name for Points Allows you to assign a layer for the points Break Entity at points If checked selected entity will be broken at each point Create Points at Endpoints Creates a point at each endpoint 5 Horizontal Distance Between Points Distance on line segments Specifies the horizontal distance between each point on line segments Distance on Curves segments Specifies the horizontal distance between each point on curve segments Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PTINT Create Points from Entities Function This command creates CSD points at the endpoints of selected entities For arcs and polylines with arc segments points are created at the radius points of the arcs The points are stored in the current coordinate file and drawn on the screen The Create Points from Entities dialog box 1s shown here Create Points from Entities 183 Create Points From Entities Symbol Mame SPTO Select Symbol Elevation Settings Prompt for Elevations lu Label Elevations W Locate on Real lt Axis Point Number Settings iw Point Numbers lu Automatic Point Numbering Starting Point Number Description Settings f Prompt for Description At Each Point Prompt for Description Per Entity f Use Entity Layer For Description fe Same Description For All Points Descript
175. he rotation of the point symbol If a point number follows the ROT code then angle from the Chapter 5 Field to Finish 158 current point to this point number is used for the rotation e g ROT45 would rotate the symbol toward point number 45 If there is no point number after the ROT code the rotation point is the next point number with the same code as the current point SMO This code is used to smooth the polyline SCA This code is used to control multi point symbols described later in this section AZI amp DIST The AZI and DIST codes are used together to locate an offset point The AZI sets the offset azimuth and DIST sets the distance The values should directly follow the code e g AZI25 DIST4 2 would draw the point offset 4 2 at an azimuth of 25 degrees JOG Special Code Allows for additional points to be inserted into the line work at perpendicular offsets Only offsets should follow the JOG code Positive numbers indicate a jog to the right and negative numbers indicate a jog to the left Alternatively RF and L can be used where is the distance to either the right or the left e g BLDG JOG R5 L12 2 L5 L12 2 also BLDG JOG 5 12 2 5 12 2 draws a closed rectangle on the right hand side of an existing line The offsets are always done in the X Y plane If the current line 1s vertical an offset to the right is along the positive X axis Just as cb pc shown above uses the pc special code to launch into a 3 point
176. highlighted selected Survey and Deed point Once selected the dialog above is displayed allowing for changes to be made Add Click this button to specify the points as either Survey or Deed points Then fill out the Edit Points dialog as desired Remove This button will remove the highlighted selected Survey and Deed points from the correlation setup This does not delete the points from the coordinate file Inverse Report This generates a report showing the inverse data from each point both survey and deed to every other point specified in the correlation set up For example if there were four points in the survey points 1 4 then the report would show inverse data from to 2 3 4 from 2 to 1 3 4 from 3 to 1 2 4 and from 4 to 1 2 3 This would be the same for the corresponding deed points Check Rotate This option that allows for user specified hold and rotation points and then reports the inverse data of each side of the tract description The hold point and rotation point must be points from the specified survey point group Find Min Rotate Determines the hold and rotation points that would result in the minimum rotation to each side of the tract description When selected the Minimum Deed Rotation Report is displayed Save Preforms a quick save if the file has previously been saved Save As This option prompts for a user specified file name and allows for a user specified location to save the file The file extension for the deed corr
177. hin ten seconds select the file to send on the TDS and select OK in the TDS dialog Uploading HP 48 and Husky The LDT point database can be converted to a CRS file and uploaded into TDS 1 Start in the TDS program select the File Transfer command Chapter 3 Data Collectors 66 2 Stop here on the TDS and go to CSD 3 Select Data Collection and pick TDS 4 In the CSD dialog enter a TDS File name This name should not include the drive and directory path or file extension 5 Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 6 Select the CSD Upload button A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload 7 Enter the range of points 8 Before clicking the Start Transfer button go to TDS and select the Receive function key 9 Within ten seconds go back to CSD and click the OK on the range of points The file will then transfer Uploading Ranger and Windows CE The LDT point database can be converted to a CRS file and uploaded into TDS 1 Start in the TDS program select the Transfer command and choose the Receive File function 2 Set the Connecting To field to HP 48 Make sure that the COM port baud rate and parity are set correctly and then select OK 3 Stop here on the TDS and go to CSD 4 Select Data Collection and pick TDS 5 In the CSD dialog enter a TDS File name This name should not include the drive and directory path or file extension 6 Check that the COM port and ba
178. his record is used as both the closing shot and angle balance records FD Foresight Direct The foresight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set When the program finds one the of direct reverse measurement records it will look for the other three records to complete the set FR Foresight Reverse The foresight reverse is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set BD Backsight Direct The backsight direct is a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set BR Backsight Reverse The backsight reverse 1s a traverse record used in a direct and reverse set EL Elevation Only This record sets the elevation in the CRD file for the specified point number Often used when an existing point with good vertical control is being traversed through Using this record type for the point would keep the elevation from changing on the existing point regardless of the measurement data AZ Azimuth Only Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine CSE Control Standard Error Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 82 SSE Set up Standard Error Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine MSE Measurement Standard Error Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine NAME Traverse Name This record
179. his record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that you want the heights applied to BK BackSight The backsight record contains the occupied point number backsight point number backsight azimuth and the set azimuth This record should precede any traverse and sideshot records that use this setup If no backsight point is entered the program uses the backsight azimuth to turn angles from The Set Azimuth is the circle reading of the instrument when sighting the backsight A Set Azimuth of zero is the default PT Store Point The store point record consists of a point number northing easting elevation and description When processing this data will be stored as a point in the coordinate file If the first Occupied point and or the initial Backsight point Edit Process Raw File 81 are not defined in the coordinate file set for processing to both points will need to be added to the rw5 file as PT Store Point records DS Description The description record is an additional note that appears in the spreadsheet editor and printouts This record can contain various information that is recorded in data collectors during field operations This data can vary from user temperature and general data to each line of data associated with Set Collection When Sets of data collected using various brands of data collection software is converted imported into the raw editor the actual measurements made during the spinning of the angl
180. hree options for the creation of point groups Create All Point Group Create Traverse Point Group and Create Sideshot Point Group The Create All Point Groupoption creates a user specified group containing all of the points defined in the rw5 file Create Traverse Point Group creates a user specified group containing only the points defined inthe traverse records TR of the rw5 file The Create Sideshot Point Group creates a user specified group that contains only the points defined in the sideshot records SS of the rw5 file Format of the raw data RW5 file Supported record header codes with their field headers BK amp raquo Backsight OP amp raquo Occupy Point Number BP amp raquo Backsight Point Number if O the next field s azimuth will be used for BS amp raquo Back Azimuth BC amp raquo Back Circle DS amp raquo Description LS amp raquo Line of Sight HI amp raquo Height of Instrument HR amp raquo Height of Rod Target SP amp raquo Store Point PN amp raquo Point Number N amp raquo North Coordinate Edit Process Raw File 117 E gt East Coordinate EL amp raquo Elevation amp raquo Point Description Note TR amp raquo Traverse SS amp raquo Side Shot CL amp raquo Closure Record AB amp raquo Angle Balance Record OP amp raquo Occupy Point Number FP amp raquo Foresight Point Number one of the following 6 AZ amp raquo Azimuth angle code 5 BR amp raquo Bearing angle code 1 NE 2 S
181. ic elevation measurements are used in survey calculations In order to convert ellipsoid heights He as measured by GPS into orthometric elevations EQ you must provide for a correction between the GPS measured ellipsoid reference ellipsoid and a constant level gravitational surface the geoid This corrections is the geoid undulation Ug The formula is He Eo Ug The program applies the Geoid model by subtracting the Geoid undulation from the GPS elevation The resulting elevation is then used and displayed In practice the Geoid model is most applicable to two types of alignment scenarios One of these types is when setting up the base over a know point and having no alignment control points The other is when there is one alignment control point When using multiple alignment control points the Geoid model is not as important because the program can model the elevation difference which can generally pick up the local Geoid undulation GPS gt Units Coordinates can be reduced into one of three available units Metric US Feet or International Feet Process gt Process Settings This option allows for the setting of user preferences and tolerances to be used during processing and generation of reports Edit Process Raw File 113 Process Settings Multiple Measurement Settings Distance Tolerance Horizontal 0 50 Vertical Report Residuals Average Type 8 Distance Measurements Coordinates Check Point Settings Report Check Points
182. ich calculations should be presented in the report Anytime you see the option Use Report Formatter as in the Cut Sheet command you may direct the output to the Report Formatter rather than directly to the Report Viewer The report can be displayed below in either the standard viewer described in the next section Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access The data set in the Report Formatter may be thought of as a spreadsheet where columns are various fields related to a single item such as northing easting elevation etc Each new row represents a new item Descriptions of these field names are displayed in the Available list of the Report Formatter To include a data field in the report highlight the field name in the Available list on the left and select the Add button This moves the field name to the Used list on the right The order of items on the right defines the order in which they will be displayed Items are initially sorted by the first column then items with the identical values in first column are sorted as specified for the second column and so on In the example below this report will show Point numbers northings eastings and elevations It will be sorted by elevation value from high to low Report Formatting Options xl Format LISTPT LISTPT Save Delete Export Import Available Used Sort order Description Add gt Remove Move Up Move Down W Columnar format W Use commas in numbers
183. ick Enter to use preview point or select Ist Base point Pick point or point number 1 PtNo Northing Easting Elev Z Description 1 4070 77 8432 52 0 00 2 Define Ist angle by Line Points Right Azimuth Bearing Bearing press Enter 3 Bearing Qdd mmss 173 3932 4 2nd Base point Pick point or point number 2 PtNo Northing Easting Elev Z Description 2 4049 28 8476 29 0 00 5 Define 2nd angle by Line Points Right Azimuth Bearing Bearing press enter 6 Bearing Qdd mmss 107 3716 Chapter 7 Point Commands 176 Computed Point 3 i nodi t ir i m adl a Po mo ud EL a X77 Pa pr 3 1st Base Point gt 2nd Base Point Prerequisite Execute Drawing Setup to set Defaults Keyboard Command bbint Bearing Distance Intersect Function This command creates a point using a bearing and a distance Prompts 1 Enter to use preview point or select known Bearing base point Pick point or point number The command prompts you for a base point from which the known bearing intersects 2 Define bearing by Line Points Bearing Line Press Enter Define the bearing by one of three methods picking two points selecting a line with the same bearing or typing in the bearing in the form of Qdd mmss similar to the Locate by Bearing command 3 Select Line or Polyline that defines Bearing select line 4 Known distance base point Pick point or point number pick a point 5 You are promp
184. id body methods The difference is that the rigid body method does a transformation with a translation and rotation and without a scale The plane similarity does a rotation translation and scale This option only applies when two or more points are used in Align Local Coordinates or the Localization routine in SurvCE Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 112 GPS gt One Point Alignment Azimuth This option applies to the rotation when using one point in Align Local Coordinates or the Localization routine in SurvCE For this alignment method the state plane coordinate is translated to the local coordinate Then the rotation can use either the state plane grid or the geodetic as north No scale is applied in this transformation The state plane and geodetic true north diverge slightly in the east and west edges of the state plane zone This option allows you to choose which north to use GPS gt Two Point Alignment Method There are two option when using this method Fit amp Rotate and Rotate Only Fit amp Rotate will use the second point in the localization file for direction and scaling The Rotate Only option allows you to use the second point in the localization file for direction but not for scaling When using the Rotate Only option any scale factor entered in the Project Scale Factor will be used GPS gt Project Scale Factor For most applications the Scale Factor should be set to 1 0 The scale factor represents the combined grid elevation fac
185. ify the range of point numbers to upload Enter the points to send but before clicking OK go to the Geodimeter data collector Start the file transfer routine by pressing the PRG key and entering program 54 Then choose Serial option 3 as the source The Geodimeter will display the serial port settings Check these values and press enter Next choose Area option 2 as the destination Then enter the job name The Geodimeter is now listening for data Quickly go back to CSD and click OK on the points to send dialog The file transfer will now go Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion is also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Communication Settings If the Geodimeter is not communicating with CSD run function 79 on the Geodimeter and make sure that it is set to 4 This setting is for the transfer message end of sequence format Surveyor s Assistant Downloading Data Collectors 73 1 From the Surveyor s Assistant data collector select the Transfer command from the main menu Fill out the transfer screen as follows e Direction OUTPUT e Format LIETZ e Data Coordinate or All Data e Port COMI or COM2 e Ckh
186. ille KY 41056 1003 e If you are using the Internet registration press Next After a few seconds your registration will complete e f your registration is successful you will receive a message like the one below If your registration is unsuc cessful please note the reason why and try again Keep in mind that each serial number should be registered to a single computer only e If you do not have access to the internet and do not have a printer you must write down the information from the User Info tab Print Fax Sheet button shown above in the Registration Wizard and fax it or mail it to Carlson Software Carlson Software AN Automatic Registration completed successfully Please print registration report For Future reference IMPORTANT NOTE FOR Autodesk Land Desktop 2004 USERS The first time you attempt to access a CSD menu you may receive the following message AutoCAD Message Please Contact AutoDesk and Download the Latest Land Desktop 2004 Service Pack Authorizing Carlson Survey Desktop 11 If you receive this message visit the Autodesk website www autodesk com and follow the links and instruc tions for downloading the latest Autodesk Land Desktop Service Pack before attempting to use Carlson Survey Desktop This service pack must be installed before Autodesk can properly communicate with CSD Report Formatter A number of CSD features use the Report Formatter tool to allow you to specify how and wh
187. imilar magnitude The standard residual is a measure of the similarity of the residual to the a priori standard error The standard residual is the measurements residual divided by the standard error displayed in the unadjusted measurement section A standard residual greater than 2 is marked with an x A high standard residual may be an indication of a blunder If there are a lot of high standard residuals it may indicate that the original standard errors set in the Settings dialog box were not realistic Adjusted observations Adjusted Distances From Sta To Sta Distance Residual stdRes stdDew 50L 503 244 7489 0 0567 m 4 6 O 0025 301 302 r9 6791 0 0143 1 5 0 0101 Adjusted Angles BS Sta Occ Sta FS Sta angle Residual stdres Stdpevitsec 503 501 502 060 11 49 25 8 Les 501 502 503 101 07 33 26 5 1 5 20 3 2 1 2 8 503 308 504 355 46 57 15 7 ld Statistics The next section displays some statistical measures of the adjustment including the number of iterations needed for the solution to converge the degrees of freedom of the network the reference variance the standard error of unit weight and the results of a Chi square test The degree of freedom is an indication of how many redundant measurements are in the survey Degree of freedom 1s defined as the number of measurements in excess of the number of measurements necessary to solve the network The standard error of unit weight relates to the overall adjustment a
188. imuth Coordinate Display Reported coordinates can be output in either North East or East North Null Elevation Value to be reported for elevations that were not calculated Process Network If there is a problem with the reduction you will be shown error messages that will help you track down the problem The data is preprocessed to calculate averaged angles and distances for sets of data For a given setup all multiple angles and distances to a point will be averaged prior to the adjustment The standard error as set in the Project Settings dialog box is the standard error for a single measurement Since the average of multiple measurements is more precise than a single measurement the standard error for the averaged measurement is computed using the standard deviation of the mean formula During the preprocessing approximate coordinate values for each point will also be calculated This saves the user from having to come up with a list of approximate coordinate values prior to processing Sideshots are separated from the raw data and processed after the adjustment If the raw data processes properly a report file will be displayed and the coordinate file will be populated with the adjusted coordinates SurvNET 133 Once you have clicked OK you will see the full statistical report produced by this routine in its own dialog box This displayed dialog is titled Network Least Squares Results It too is categorized with the use of six tabs
189. ion for Points Separate Attribute Layers fe Mone f Points Symbola Both Layer Mame for Points Cancel Prompts 1 In the Create Entities to Points dialog box set parameters for the points created Symbol Name Displays the symbol name Select Symbol Allows you to select a new symbol type The symbol is displayed to the right 2 Under Elevation Settings determine the point attributes and elevation Prompt for Elevations You are prompted for elevation Locate on Real Z Axis The point acquires the elevation of the selected entities Label Elevations Specifies whether or not to label the elevations 3 Point Number Settings determines how the intersect points are numbered Point Numbers This option assigns point numbers to the created points Automatic Point Numbering Numbers the new points automatically You will be prompted for point numbers if the option is not checked Starting Point Number Sets the starting point number for automatic point numbering 4 Description Settings provides the option to assign descriptions to all points or to assign the same description to all points associated with a single entity or to prompt each time for the point description 5 Separate Attribute Layers determines layers for the point attributes None The point symbol point number elevation and description will use the layer names PNTMARK PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC Points Layer names a
190. ions for adjoiner text Layer Allows you to set the layer for the adjoiner text Text Style Allows you to set the text style for the adjoiner text Text Size Scaler Allows you to set the text scaler to determine text size Justification Allows you to set the text justification See the AutoCAD Reference Manual for details on each justification choice Dimension Line Type allows you to determine the line style to use for dimensions Single Arrow Line Draws a line with an arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure Dual Arrows Line Draws dual arrowhead Standard Line Draws a line with no arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure Curved Leaders Draws a curved line with an arrowhead from the dimension text to the figure Dimension Only Draws the dimension text with no line Keyboard Command svtextdf Prerequisite None Offset Dimensions Function This command labels the perpendicular distance between a point and a line or polyline The point can be a building corner or other object The endpoint snap is on by default for picking this point although you may choose another snap mode manually There is also an option for arrow only on end of line The text layer size style and the dimensioning method are set in the Survey Text Defaults command Prompts end on Pick Bldg Object Corner pick a point Pick Line To Offset From pick a line or polyline Offset Dimensions 235 Offset Dimensions showing perpendicula
191. is command allows you to input any combination of turned angles azimuths or bearings while remaining on an occupied point A point is occupied by inversing to it traversing to it or by using the commands Occupy Point Draw Locate Point or Enter Assign Point described in this manual e The command prompts for an Angle Bearing Code that defines the angle or bearing type Codes 1 through 4 define the bearing quadrants 1 being North East 2 South East 3 South West and 4 North West Code 5 is a north based azimuth 6 is an angle turned to the left 7 is an angled turned to the right 8 is a deflection angle left and 9 is a deflection angle right The Side Shot command plots the points calculated and stores them in the current coordinate file if point numbering is on If Point Protect is turned on Side Shots checks if the point numbers are already stored in the file All points calculated radiate from the occupied point Use the Traverse Inverse or Occupied Point commands to define the occupied and backsight points Prompts 1 Exit Options Line Traverse Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt 6 Code 6 for angle turned to left 2 Enter Angle dd mmss lt 45 5413 gt 22 3524 Angle of 22 degrees 35 minutes 24 seconds 3 Number inverse lt Distance gt 120 91 4 Enter Vertical Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 88 2548 This prompt comes up only if you have Vertical angle prompting set to l or 2 5 Instrument Height lt 5 0 gt 5
192. iscussion Groups Carlson Software operates user discussion groups The NNTP address is news news carlsonsw com Visit our website at http www carlsonsw com for complete details on how to connect to these discussion groups Electronic Mail The technical support email address is support carlsonsw com Internet The following internet resources are available Knowledge base http update carlsonsw com kbase main php Program updates and patches http update carlsonsw com Technical support documents http www carlsonsw com Phone or Facsimile Phone 606 564 5028 Fax 606 564 6422 Fax for registrations only 606 564 9525 Please submit your company name product version and serial number with all support inquiries Chapter 20 Help 272 Index About Carlson Survey Desktop 290 Adjustment 67 125 126 258 264 267 268 275 Align 129 249 252 Angle Balance 110 111 124 126 260 Angle Mode 22 Append Another Raw File 133 Arc 149 172 186 236 Area by Closed Polylines 238 Area by Interior Point 237 Area by Lines and Arcs 236 Area Commands 233 Area Label Defaults 234 Area Radial from Curve 241 Area Radial from Curve 241 Attribute Layout ID 146 Attributes 95 Authorizing Carlson Survey Desktop 11 Azimuth 22 109 110 118 119 122 129 165 174 213 2033203 Backsight 109 111 171 174 281 282 Bearing 22 42 171 175 177 180 181 206 210 211 271 Bearing Bearing Inters
193. ish It differs from the draw traverse and sideshot lines under the Tools Menu of the Raw Editor by using a field to finish code table fld to define how the points and linework are to be drawn and layerized There are three settings for this option Manual Auto and Prompt Manual means that the file will not be processed using the field to finish codes and no points or linework with be drawn upon existing the raw editor The Auto option will use the current or last used field to finish file fld to draw the points and lines on the drawing screen when the raw editor is existed The option of Prompt will give the option to draw the points and lines to the screen With this setting specified the following prompt will be displayed when existing the editor Field To Finish Draw points and linework Yes Tools Menu Direct Reverse Report This routine creates a report of direct and reverse shots along with the resulting averaged shots Any tolerance specified in the Process Settings gt Direct Reverse Settings section that is exceeded will be displayed in this report The residuals are the difference between the measurement and the final average Reduce Direct Reverse This routine processes the direct and reverse shots and simplifies the raw file by replacing the sets of direct and reverse shots with the resulting average traverse record Edit Process Raw File 115 Update Raw from Points This routine is used to update the raw data base
194. its US Feet Horizontal Units Meters Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 503 BS 501 FS 507 Low 211 54 35 High 211 55 20 000 00 45 Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 503 BS 501 FS 508 Low 215 11 46 High 215 12 20 000 00 34 Y Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 508 BS 503 FS 509 Low 151 23 02 High 151 23 42 000 00 40 Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 508 BS 503 FS 516 Am M amam ARI ee lt Preprocessing and Header Information The following excerpt from the report shows the header information and the preprocessing results The header infor mation consists of the date and time the input and output file names the coordinate system the curvature refraction setting maximum iterations and distance units During the preprocessing process multiple angles are reduced to a single angle and multiple slope distances vertical angles HI s and rod heights are reduced to a single horizontal distance and vertical distance During this process the horizontal angle horizontal distance and vertical difference spreads are computed If the spreads exceed the tol erance settings from the Settings dialog box a warning message 1s displayed showing the high and low measurement and the difference between the high and low measurement Chapter 2 Tutorials 54 Mon Jan 19 06 25 15 004 Input File ciiscadxml2 AUSERA Emp rwg output File c sscadxml2 UsER tmp RPT Curvature refraction c
195. l size and other actions to apply with each code Field to Finish can translate the field points into Autodesk Land Desktop points with symbol layer and size defined by the code The Point Defaults command under the Points menu contains the settings for labeling the description point number and elevation as well as locating the point at zero or at the real Z The Draw Locate Points command provides a simpler method for drawing points compared with Field to Finish NOTE Carlson Survey Desktop CSD also allows for conversion from a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The Edit Process Raw file command in CSD can process an RWS file The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion 1s for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead This Fieldbook conversion is located in the Data Collection features as a button called Convert RW5 to Fieldbook and in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook There are two different methods for connecting linework in Field to Finish One method creates line work by connecting points with the same code The line type is defined by the code either as points only no line work lines 2D polylines or 3D polylines breaklines Distinct lines with the same code are defined by adding a group number to the end of the code name in the data file With this method all points with the description CODEI will be one line and points with CODE2
196. l Description Writer E i i E Pick Reference Lines lt Output Options f Report Viewer C Text File C MText Object Settings Bearing Distance Pt Desc General Optional Input Line Curve Alea Heset OF Cancel Help About Pick Boundary Polyline Designates the polyline boundary to use The boundary should be a closed polyline drawn in the direction of advance Pick Reference Lines Selects lines that tie into the polyline boundary for the legal description These should be line entities with one endpoint exactly the same as the beginning point of the boundary polyline If a CSD point exists at the end of the line away from the boundary the command picks up its description If not you are prompted for the description You can choose any number of reference lines Header File Designates the optional header text file If a valid file name is entered it will be written into the top of the output file Footer File Used for the optional footer text file this is written into the bottom of the output file Report Viewer The output is sent to the standard report viewer Text File The output is sent to an external text file as designated in the output file section of this manual Mtext Object This creates an Mtext object in the current drawing You will be prompted for a starting point which is the upper left corner as well as a second point that determines the width an
197. layout ID open and edit the associated SRVPNO drawing This allows you to assign a different point display Style referred to as the attribute layout ID with each par ticular code This option is also available when multiple codes are selected The option appears in the Multiple Set dialog By selecting different attribute ID s you can set the location of the point number elevation and description with respect to the node of the point change the rotation or set the font and color of these attributes New ID Layouts are made by loading the file for Srvpnol dwg or Srvpno2 dwg or any of the Srvpnox dwg files found in the SUP subdirectory The attributes and their colors can be edited and re saved as a new Attribute Layout ID To save as ID 6 for example use SaveAs and save the file as Srvpno6 dwg Locate Pts on Real Z Axis Draw the points at the actual point elevation Otherwise the points are drawn at zero elevation e g you could turn this option off for the FH for fire hydrant code to drawn them at zero The GND code could then have this option On to draw the ground shots at their elevations Random Rotate Randomly rotates the symbol e g this option could be used for tree symbols in order to have the trees drawn in various orientations Line Width Controls the width for the linework Only applies to 2D polylines Distinct Point Layer When this toggle is selected the line work is created in the layer defined in the Layer field and th
198. le Edit Display Add Process Compute Tools Help lPntNo 1 21 OcPt InstHt 5 320 OcPt 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Ri InstHt 5 400 OcPt File Edit Display Add Process Compute Pts Northing 5000 0000 5100 0000 BsPt 21 RodHt 6 000 FsPt RodHt 6 000 FsPt 4 101 Elevation 70 cmn Easting 5000 0000 4900 0000 Azi Code HorzAngle AR w 133 5330 Code HorzA ngle AR w 208 5658 AR Ow 220 4433 Elevation 100 0000 100 0000 Set zi 0 0000 SlopeDist 711 320 SlopeDist 201 303 299 989 Desc START Desc IPF Disturbed enith ng 82 4057 ZenithAng 89 1805 88 5432 Figure 2 Tools Help Horthing 5000 0000 5100 0000 BsPt 21 RodHt 6 000 Fakt 2 RodHt 6 000 FsPt 4 101 Elevation 120 0000 FsPt a 102 19 6 Easting 5000 0000 4900 0000 Azi Code HorzAngle AR v 133 5330 Code HorzAngle AR 208 56583 AR 220 4433 Code HorzAngle AR ww 247 1653 AR 280 0000 AR 289 3456 AR w 277 4842 AR 181 3400 AR w 237 1759 Elevation Desc 100 0000 START 100 0000 SetAzi 0 0000 SlopeDist Zenitha Ang Desc 711 320 89 4057 IPF Disturbed SlopeDist 201 303 299 95859 zenith ng Desc 89 1805 88 5432 G5 SlopeDist 197 100 112 223 1399 179 ZenithAng Desc 091 88 5240 002 80 0000 490 51 4405 885 580 2928 886 593 1757 680 92 5607 Figure 2A Show Row This option shows rows that have been hidden To sho
199. lezsL and Desktop 0054 fonts m C Program Filez L and Desktop 0054 help Move Up C Program FilezsL and Desktop 2005 suppartscalor i C Program FilessL and Desktop 20054 land g e Working Support File Search Path Set Current g e Device Driver File Search Path g lal Project Files Search Path g T Menu Help and Miscellaneous File Names g T Test Editor Dictionar and Font File Names g T Print File Spooler and Prolog Section Mames T Move Down Specify the folders in which AutoCAD should look for text fonts menus plug ins drawings to insert linetypes and hatch patterns that are not in the current folder Cancel Select Next to continue the installation 5 Carlson Survey Desktop will now be installed on your computer Depending on your computer this may take a few minutes 6 When the installation is complete this dialog box will appear Setup Complete Setup has finished installing Carlson Survey Desktop en your computer Setup can launch the Read Me file and Carlson Survey Desktop Choose the options you want below Click Finish to complete Setup Finish Chapter 1 Product Overview 6 Select Finish to complete the installation Uninstalling Carlson Survey Desktop CSD may be uninstalled using the standard Windows Add Remove Programs option NOTE If you uninstall Carlson Survey Desktop and then re install any created special symbol libraries will be lost 1 Use the Win
200. line Offset 3D Polyline Function This command allows you to offset a 3D polyline entity in both the horizontal and vertical directions e There are three offset methods The Interval method applies one horizontal and one vertical offset to all the vertices of the polyline The Constant method uses a horizontal offset and sets the elevation of the polyline to one constant elevation The Variable method allows you to specify each horizontal and vertical offset individually either by polyline segment or for each point The vertical offset can be specified by actual vertical distance percent slope or slope ratio Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 248 Prompts 1 Enter the offset method lt Interval gt Constant Variable Press Enter 2 Vertical Horizontal offset amount 15 3 Percent Ratio Vertical offset amount 0 10 4 Select a polyline to offset Enter for none select a 3D polyline 5 Select side to offset pick point Select a point on the graphics screen in the direction of the desired offset Prerequisite 3D polylines Keyboard Command OFFSET3D Fillet 3D Polyline Function This command fillets two segments of a 3D polyline with the given radius AutoCAD s FILLET command does not support 3D Polyline entities Since 3D polylines cannot have arcs this command draws the fillet arc as a series of short chords The elevations along the curve are interpolated from the 3D polyline Prompts Ente
201. ll and the back of a wall with only the face of wall shots actually measured in the field The expression END is used to end this sequence and on foresight point 73 another use of HS would start a new polyline You can substitute for END such as using to end as noted above Field to Finish has a button called Code Table Settings where all reserved special codes can be substituted with codes of your own design This makes adapting to CSD much easier You don t abandon most of your existing coding system but simply re apply it In fact CSD can import your existing coding systems from both LDD and Eagle Point NOTE If you end a polyline or line sequence the start of a new one is assumed if the same text is used Similarly if you don t use END but prefer to start a new polyline with BEG or whatever code you select the polyline will end on that last use of that description and a new polyline will be started There is no need for simultaneous use of BEG and END Importing Tutorial2 TXT at 20 Scale To follow along with this tutorial it is recommended that you begin a new project called Tutorial2 and a new drawing within the project called Tutorial2_ 1 Many people consider it good practice not to name the drawing the same name as the project When asked for scale choose 1 20 Imperial At a 20 scale points look good if plotted about 1 10 the size of the scale or 2 units in height Because we plan to import the points in Autodesk La
202. lose Follow Undo lt Pick point or point numbers gt pick a point Slope Ratio Interpolate Degree lt Elevation gt lt 0 00 gt 444 Z 444 00 Hz dist 3 67 Slope dist 9 72 Slope 245 3 Ratio 0 4 1 Arc Direction Close Extend Follow Undo lt Pick point or point numbers pick a point Slope Ratio Interpolate Degree lt Elevation gt lt 0 00 gt 399 Z 399 00 Hz dist 3 16 Slope dist 45 11 Slope 1425 2 Ratio 0 1 1 Arc Direction Close Extend Follow Undo lt Pick point or point numbers gt press Enter to end Keyboard Command 2DP Prerequisite None 3D Polyline 241 Join Nearest Function This command joins lines or polylines together and allows you to join lines that do not exactly meet You specify the maximum distance to join along with other options in the dialog box shown below You can join several entities at once Join Nearest Options Ed Max separation to join Pick Connection Method f Average Endpoints Together Directly Connect Endpoints Fillet with Radius Zero e Convert lines into polylines v Join only identical layers Join only common elevations Cancel Help 1 Specify the maximum separation distance parameter Entities beyond this distance will not join 2 Under Connection Method determine how entities are connected Average Endpoints Together Averages the endpoints of the two entities when joined Directly Connect Endpoints Directly connects
203. lp 75 A polyline is drawn to 75 units 5 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help B145 0000 The pointer is turned toward NE at a bearing of 45 degrees 6 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help 50 A polyline is drawn to 50 units 7 Enter or pick distance to draw A B C E L M N O P R S T U Help Press Enter Press Enter to end the com mand Prerequisite An existing line or polyline with at least one segment from which to start Keyboard Command EXTENDER Boundary Polyline Function This is a streamlined analog of the AutoCAD command Boundary The Carlson version is faster and works in many cases where Boundary fails Boundary Polyline supports a snap tolerance which means that you may specify a maximum gap to close when creating a closed polyline To create closed polylines from any existing linework simply select all entities you would like to use and specify desired snap tolerance Then click inside openings you would like to trace and the routine will generate correspond ing closed polylines The duplicate polylines are detected and not created so that clicking more than once in the same area does not change anything These new polylines are always created in the current layer Layers of the original linework do not matter Prompts Select polylines pick an entities to be used Enter snap tolerance or press Enter for none Pick an internal point pick the points to enclose
204. ls Help The different record types are described below TR Traverse The traverse record contains the occupied point number foresight point number angle mode horizontal angle distance vertical angle and description When processed this record will calculate and store the coordinates for the foresight point Traversing also moves the setup by making the traverse foresight point the next occupied point and the traverse occupied point becomes the next backsight point The different angle codes are NE for northeast bearing SE for southeast SW for southwest NW for northwest AZ for azimuth AL for angle left AR for angle right DL for deflection angle left and DR for deflection angle right To set the angle code pick on the Code down arrow and choose from the list The horizontal and vertical angles should be entered as dd mmss For example 45 2305 is 45 degrees 23 minutes and 5 seconds The vertical angle can be shown as vertical angle 0 degrees level zenith angle 90 degrees level or elevation difference The vertical angle mode is set in the Display menu The distance mode is also set in the Display menu as either slope or horizontal distance The description field is used as the foresight point description SS SideShot The sideshot record is the same as the traverse record except that sideshot does not move the setup HI Instrument and Rod Height This record sets the instrument and rod heights used in elevation calculations T
205. mand bdint Distance Distance Intersect Function This command creates a point at the distance distance intersection from two base points e The command prompts for two distances and two base points The two possible intersections labeled A and B are shown on the screen e Select near the desired intersection or type in the letter A or B The A intersection is the first possible inter section clockwise from the first point Prompts 1 Select Ist base point Pick point or point number 1 2 Points lt Ist distance 46 72 3 Select 2nd base point Pick point or point number 2 4 Points lt 2nd distance gt 38 96 5 Pick near solution or Enter A or B pick a point Chapter 7 Point Commands 178 Sn A Solution B i4 xls d r i P C N Z Solution A No Prerequisite None Keyboard Command ddint Resection Function This command calculates point coordinates given the angle and distance from two or three reference points X Y and Z coordinates can all be calculated e The Resection command calculates the coordinate by averaging the distance distance and angle angle so lutions Since there is redundant data the final calculated coordinate differs slightly from the individual measurements e g in a 3 point resection there are two different distance distance solutions one between the first second point and one between the second third points e Resection reports the difference betwee
206. multiple design points to the same survey point Chapter 11 Cut Sheet 216 Points To Compare Selected Points Point Point Distance 34 785 38 859 946 988 Survey Pointe Point Horth Elevation Desc 1 4156 537 83500 635 397 419 6 BB 2 4110 658 8280 758 400 558 58 3 4071 817 8263 931 398 483 H 9 iF Design Points Point Horth Elevation Desc 4070 320 8256 408 396 248 1 88 Fl 4868 55 8207 370 395 440 1 5 4055 203 8180 778 391 996 d Y Range of Points to compare Highest Point Number 5 Survey Range of Paints Design Range of Points Cancel 1 Points to Compare Establishes in the upper window all the point pairings that you wish to compare for the cut sheet This is done 3 ways Entering the survey point and design point in the lower dialog boxes e g 3 and 13 as shown above and clicking add Selecting the points from Survey Points and Design Points sections and clicking add Matching points that are within a distance tolerance from each other using Match by Tolerance This last option can be a huge time saver particularly when there is a lack of familiarity with the pairings to analyze When comparing points there is an option to flag points in the report that exceed the specified distance tolerance as shown here Cutsheet Points Options Source of Points for Comparison Output Option f Curent Coordinate File Bearing Distance Another Coordi
207. n 7 Within 10 seconds go back to SMI and press Enter for the last point to send To send raw data use the Print Raw command in SMI along with the same CSD procedure used for point data Uploading 1 From the SMI data collector go to the File Transfer command by typing More NXT TO48 COMM Data Collectors 67 2 In SMI version 6 or later type Job KERM RECV Also in version 6 make sure that first function key reads NE and not XY in the Job KERM screen Otherwise the coordinate northing and easting will be reversed 3 Enter the first point to send followed by the last point to send Enter the job name Before pressing Enter stop here and go to CSD Run Data Collection and choose SMI In the CSD dialog specify the same job name as entered in SMI Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly Select the Upload button 10 A dialog allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload Enter the same range of points as entered on the SMI 11 Return to SMI and select Enter for job name 12 Choose the OK button for range of points in CSD Oo ON NN LI Chapter 3 Data Collectors 68 Leica Leica Data Format Conversion Download Recelve Leica File ata an res 351 8 O GIF 10 Upload Send LOT Point Data Convert Leica Raw to Ro Convert Fw To Fieldbook C BSI AE All Others Direct Reverse Order Coding System Point Format 9 BFFB KEY wildsoft CO Meters
208. n copied by a single selection pick will copy only the single entity picked e g the polyline but not the X s A continuous linetype will copy or offset as one entity including the X s in the fence Symbol This is the point symbol for the code To avoid drawing a symbol use the Carlson Survey symbol named SPTO Color The line work will be drawn in this color The default is BYLAYER Symbol Size This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size in AutoCAD The horizontal scale can be set in Drawing Setup Field to Finish 153 Text Size This is a scaler value that is multiplied by the horizontal scale to obtain the actual size Unit Symbol Draws the point symbol at unit 1 1 scale e g this option could be used for a symbol that is already drawn to actual dimensions such as a car symbol Set Template For 3D polyline codes this option allows you to assign a template TPL file to the code The code points act as the centerline for the template and the program will draw parallel 3D polylines for each break point in the template Entity Type Defines the line type to be created Points only does not create any line work 3D Polyline can be used for breaklines Hard Breakline This will tag the 3D polylines created with this code as hard breaklines In Triangulate amp Contour contours are not smoothed as they cross hard barriers Separate Layers Controls the layers of
209. n half the distance of 2 to 3 You do not need to enter N before entering a number defined distance The Traverse command also draws lines between located points 1f the Line On Off option in the COGO menu is set on and plots the points calculated and stores them in the current coordinate file if point numbering is on The point settings are defined in the Point Defaults command under the Points menu If Point Protect is turned on the Traverse command checks whether the point numbers are already stored in the file Point Protect is set in the Coordinate File Utilities command under the Points menu Some Angle Bearing code input options for the Traverse command are set by entering O for Options The Angle Right option prompts for the angle right and skips the angle bearing code prompt The Azimuth option prompts for the azimuth and skips the angle bearing code prompt Prompts 1 Occupy Point Pick point or point number You will be prompted for the occupied point only the first time you use the command You can use the Inverse or Occupy Point commands to set the occupied and backsight points 2 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt Press Enter Pressing Enter uses the default angle right code 3 Backsight Point Pick point or point number 4 Enter Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt 88 1324 You can also enter L or R to define an angle 90 degrees Left or Right 5 Number inverse lt Distance gt 100 6 Vertical A
210. n the final coordinate and the individual solutions as residuals indi cating whether the data is good High residuals suggest a problem with the input data Prompts 1 In the first Resection dialog box select either two or three reference points Resection ES 2Point 3 Point Cancel 2 In the second Resection dialog box assign the reference point Resection 179 Resection Ed First Paint Paint E Northing 381 7 358 Easting 7509 688 Elevation 0 000 b Inst Height 0 000 Target Height 0 000 OF Cancel Point You must enter the point number of your reference point These reference points need to be stored in the current coordinate file before you run this command Inst Height You must enter the instrument height Target Height You must enter the target height If you need only the 2D solution then enter the instrument and target heights as 0 0 3 In the Manual Read dialog box specify parameters for the calculation Manual Read E Angle Format dd mms Horizontal Angle 167 4418 Zenith Angle Bg Slope Distance 50 90 Horizontal Angle You must enter a horizontal angle from the resection to the reference points The horizontal angle is the horizontal azimuth or angle right from the unknown point to the reference point Zenith Angle You must enter a zenith angle For a 2D solution set the zenith angle to 90 degrees Slope Distance You must
211. n to append Everything after the 1s added directly to the point description and is not considered a code In other words a data point with the description UP 150 with the same code UP definition above would be drawn with the description POLE 150 Multiple codes are defined by including each code in the point description field separated by a space A single data point can be used in different lines by assigning it multiple codes For instance a point might be part of both a curb line and a driveway line with a description of CURB DRW Field to Finish uses spaces as the delimiter for multiple codes You should avoid spaces in the descriptions except for where multiple codes are intended or after the character e g a code for a light post should not be LGT POST but instead might be LGTPOST When Field to Finish detects spaces in the descriptions at start up you will be asked whether or not to process the multiple codes Possible Multiple Codes Found E Multiple codes may have been found on a single point EP SHD f Split all multiple codes Split no multiple codes Split this ane for now C Don t split this one Field to Finish 149 Using the Main Field to Finish Dialog The main Field to Finish dialog is shown above Code Table Settings Code Table Settings Opens the Code Definition Settings dialog shown below Select Code File C Program Files Carlson Software 20024 datar survey
212. n view Date Format Controls the display of dates in CSD reports with this drop down menu The default is Windows Setting which allows you to control it with Windows Control Panel Several other common formats are available Coordinate Report Order Choose whether coordinates are reported in northing easting or easting northing order 2 COGO Settings Generate Report Log Allows output from several commands to be accumulated in a report buffer Any report that is displayed in the standard report viewer is also added to the report log When activated the report log resides in the lower left corner of the desktop as a minimized title bar displaying the number of lines in the report buffer To view the report log maximize the icon on this title bar You can edit the report log save it to a file or print it To quickly turn the report log on and off you can type REPORT at the command prompt which toggles the report log on off Chapter 19 Configure Carlson Survey Desktop 268 Use South Azimuth Allows you to use a south azimuth for calculations Show Setup Points on Status Bar When selected the current occupied and backsight point numbers are visible in the program status bar Automatic Raw File On When selected a RW5S file is automatically created during any of the follow ing commands Locate Point Traverse Sideshot and Inverse 3 Angle Mode Determines how angles are entered and displayed Bearing Set
213. nate File Deltax Deltar C North South E ast w est Horizontal Tolerance Wertical Tolerance e Report Coordinates Prerequisite None Keyboard Command CUTRPRT Cut Sheet 217 Chapter 11 Cut Sheet 218 Layout Commands 12 Lot Layout Function This command draws lots based on a front and back polyline Starting from the front polyline the program calculates two lot side lines perpendicular from the front polyline that intersect the back polyline and create the specified lot size Lots are created along the front polyline in the order that the front polyline is drawn If the front polyline needs to be reversed use the Reverse Polyline command The direction of the back polyline does not matter The lots can be drawn as closed polylines or just the lot sides can be drawn There 1s also an option to automatically create all the possible lots at the specified area between the front and back polylines or to prompt for each 0 4 acre lot In prompt mode the program reports the remaining area between the front and back polylines and then asks for the lot size The lot size can be specified either by area or frontage along the front polyline The lots are sized to meet the specified area and also meet the minimum frontage and backlot distances The program starts by checking the lot area at the minimum distances If this area is greater than the target then the lot is drawn at the minimum distance and the resulting lot area will be
214. nce shot The closing shot is from 3 to 4 with point 4 being the closing point Point 14 is the closing reference point Edit Process Raw File 123 Ele E dii EE AER Add ERD Process Sample mue Tools Help 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 START 5100 4900 100 EsPt Hel ether 21 0 0000 RodHt 6 000 FsPt Code Hor z ngle SlopebDist Zenith ng Description E AR 268 5330 711 320 82 4050 Pe BRodHt 6 000 FsPt Code Horzingle Slopebist Zenithing Description 3 AR lz62 5448 457 760 89 3236 P32 RodHt 6 000 FsPt ode Horz ngle SlopeDist Zenith ng Desc N UR E a01 31 69 1503 P4 Portion of typical Sokkia SDR raw data file OONMSDR20 V03 05 Jan 22 98 19 14 122211 10NMW970709A 13CPSea level crn N 02TP00015000 000005000 0000085 63500005 22000000PK FD 08K100035000 000005192 9200081 7450000MN SET 07TP0001000390 00000000 00000000 09F100010003193 10000092 404 16660 00000000MN SET 09F100010100193 00000091 31388880 000000008N REC Portion of typical Wild Leica raw data file 410001 0000008B 42 00000000 43 00000000 44 00000000 45 00000000 110002 00000002 21 124 35959590 22 104 08748240 31 1 00000000 51 0 0012 000 110003 00000003 21 124 00000000 22 104 08748240 31 1 00267075 51 0 0012 000 110004 00000004 21 124 00420390 22 104 08702570 31 1 00168234 51 0 0012 000 110005 00000005 21 124 26029130 22 104 09311370 31 1 00206133 51 0 0012 000 410006 000000IP
215. nd Desktop and the points will plot in the process of importing we need to set the point height ahead of time This is done with the command Point Settings found at the top of the Points pulldown menu Within Point Settings dialog box choose the Marker tab and set the height to 2 as shown below Chapter 2 Tutorials 42 E Point Settings Create Insert Update Coords Description Keys Marker Text Preferences Specify the Size and Shape of the Point Marker Symbol Use Custom Marker C Use AutoCAD POINT for Marker Custom Marker Style Superimposed ERASE HH 56 5 6 Custom Marker Size O Size Relative To Screen Size In Absolute Units Size Units Align Marker With Text Rotation Now select Import Points within the Import Export Points selection under the Points pulldown menu Set to PNEZD comma delimited and select the file Tutorial2 TXT in the SurveyDesktop Data folder within Autodesk Land Desktop Press OK at the next screen then Zoom Extents when done Under Edit Points Display Properties S for Selection you can select all points and then change the coloring of the point numbers elevations or descriptions for better viewing You will obtain a very dense plot of points which appears in part as shown below Ge ECT Fool Foo 100 acd do LE L ST EL 34429 4034 x A394 436 FCE Field to Finish
216. nd desktop 004 Surveydesktop D ata T vt Hd SYMBOL LINETYPE ENTITY TIE CODE FULL NAHE DESC Fence amp Walls lt To draw the linework only using this pre defined table click Draw This brings up the following dialog of options Bottom of Fence Late GATE TOP OF HEA 12 TREE POST SILT FENCE SIGH POST SIGH TOP OF HEA TOP OF POST spt SPTH spth SPT5 spth SPT4 spt SPT spta BYLAYER Slash 5 CONTINUOUS Haybale BYLAYER BYLAYER CONTINUOUS centers CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS Code Definitions 3DPline 3D amp 2D Point 2DPline 3DPline Point Point 2DPline Point 3DPline FENCES FCE Fences Fences Utilitie OAK Detail SILT FEH SIGHS Fences LAYER OH FF n n n n n n n n n On and here under Entities to Draw de select Points and Symbols but keep Lines selected as shown Chapter 2 Tutorials 44 Range of Point Numbers to Process Highest point number 300 Range of Points 1 7300 Entities to Draw Points Lines Symbols Locate Linework on Real lt Axis O Dr O Off By Code PC PT Curve Type 5 Bezier O Tangent Arcs Layer Prefix Erase Existing Field to Finish Linework Pause on Undefined Codes Auto Zoom Extents Point Motes If you freeze the O layer containing the points you will obtain something like this This is a start and the pattern of the project is now more obvious but it is also
217. nd not an individual measurement A value of one indicates that the results of the adjustment are consistent with the a priori standard errors The reference variance 1s the standard error of unit weight squared The chi square test is a test of the goodness of fit of the adjustment It is not an absolute test of the accuracy of the survey The a priori standard errors which are defined in the project settings dialog box or with the SE record in the raw data file are used to determine the weights of the measurements These standard errors can also be looked at as an estimate of how accurately the measurements were made The chi square test merely tests whether the results of the adjusted measurements are consistent with the a priori standard errors Notice that 1f you change the project standard errors and then reprocess the survey the results of the chi square test change even though the measurements themselves did not change In our example the chi square test failed at the 95 significant level But all distance residuals were all less than 01 meters The largest angle residual was 42 seconds There were some preprocessing angle spreads in the 30 to 45 seconds range The angle standard errors in the Setting screen are probably set too low for the quality of the actual measurements If we were to increase the pointing and reading standard error in the Settings screen by 5 10 seconds we would probably pass the chi square Also notice that if you change
218. ndard errors Note that if you change the project standard errors and then reprocess the survey the results of the Chi square test change Network Least Squares Results E Main Report Unadjusted Obs Adjusted Obs Sideshots Vertical Coordinates LEAST SQUARES ADJUSTMENT REPORT Mon Jun 27 10 31 37 2005 2D Geodetic Model Input Raw Files Coordinate File c scad2006 DATA test crd Traverse File Curvature refraction correction ON Maximum iterations 10 Convergence Limit 0 001000 Local Coordinate System Scale Factor 1 000000 Horizontal Units US Feet Confidence Interval 95 00 Default Standard Errors Distance Constant 0 010 PPM 5 000 Horiz Angle Pointing 3 0 Reading 3 0 Total Station Centering 0 005 Height 0 100 Target Centering 0 005 Height 0 100 Azimuth 5 Coordinate Control N 0 010 E 0 010 0 02 0 Horizontal Distance from 2 to 1 exceeds tolerance Low 104 55 High 104 62 Diff 0 02 Unadjusted Observations This tabbed section lists the reduced and averaged measurements that contribute to the network When multiple measurements are used the standard error for the averaged measurement will be computed using the average of the mean formula There is a list included of the control coordinates used in the network adjustment These coordinates have been read from the raw data file Note that the standard errors for the control points are displayed This section shows the azimuths
219. neering work Deed Work CSD allows you to enter old deeds and plot the linework then add bearing and distance annotation optionally Distances can be entered in meters or feet and even in the old measurement forms of chains poles links and varas Both tangent and non tangent arcs can be entered Closures distances traversed and areas are automatically reported Working in reverse the Legal Description command creates a property description suitable for deed recording directly from a closed polyline on the screen If that polyline has point numbers with descriptions at any of the property corners these descriptions will appear in the deed report e g thence N 45 degrees 25 minutes 10 seconds E to a fence post Deed files can be saved re loaded edited re drawn and printed or plotted to the screen as a report Utilities CSD contains many powerful utilities particularly polyline utilities You can Join Nearest disconnected polylines offset 3D polylines and reverse polyline directions Extend by Distance lets you create building footprints with left and right entries Reduce Vertices weeds out extra vertices and cuts down on drawing size Chapter 1 Product Overview 2 Installing Carlson Survey Desktop When installing Carlson Survey Desktop you must have permission to write to the necessary system registry sections Make sure that you have administrative access on the computer on which you are installing this software
220. nerated during the preprocessing of the raw data The primary messages displayed will be warnings when multiple angles horizontal distances and vertical differences exceed the tolerance settings as set in the project settings The low and high measurement and the difference are displayed Inverse The Inverse button is only active after a network has been processed successfully Inverse can be used to obtain the bearing and distance between any two points in the network Additionally the standard deviation of the bearing and distance between the two points is displayed This information can be used to determine the relative precision between any two points in the network If you need to certify the Positional Tolerances of your monuments per the ALTA Standards use this function to determine these values e g if you must certify that all monuments have a positional tolerance of no more than 0 07 feet inverse between the monuments in as many combinations as you deem necessary and make note of the standard deviations of the distances If none of them are larger than 0 07 feet you have met the standards Relative Error Ellipse Reports the relative error ellipse from one point to another Draw Error Ellipses Draws the error ellipse from one point to another Draw Error Hlipses E Seale Factor 50 0 0 Layer ELLIPSE Exit Exit Ends your session in the Network Least Squares Settings dialog and brings you back to the Raw Editor
221. ngle Type 0 3 lt 2 gt Press Enter You see this prompt only if Vertical Angle Prompt in Point Defaults is set to None 7 Enter Zenith Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt Press Enter Hz Distance gt 100 00 8 Enter Point Description lt gt ip 9 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt 14 9 45 2045 Uses the bearing defined by point numbers 14 amp 9 and subtracts the angle 45 degrees 20 minutes and 45 seconds You can use a or in this type of entry 10 Number inverse Distance N You can enter 14 9 2 here as well 11 Point number inverse e g 10x20 14 9 2 Causes the command to recall the distance from point number 14 to 9 and divide it by 2 12 Enter Zenith Angle dd mmss lt 90 0000 gt Press Enter 13 Enter Point Descriptions lt ip gt Press Enter 14 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse lt Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt L Select Line or Polyline that defines Bearing select line that defines bearing 15 Number inverse lt Distance gt 100 16 Enter Zenith Angle dd mmss lt 90 00 gt Press Enter Hz Distance gt 100 00 17 Enter Point Description lt ip gt Press Enter 18 Exit Options Line Side Shot Inverse Angle Bearing Code lt 7 gt gt E Input to end the command Enter S or SS to execute the Side Shots command or I to execute the Inverse command Prerequisite None Keyboard Command traverse Side Shots Function Chapter 6 COGO Commands 168 Th
222. ning and ending terms for the description Reference Line General Prefix Specify the prefix string when a reference line is selected Case Choose the button corresponding to the string case conversion desired If you want no changes to be made choose none Choosing upper lower or proper case conversion will affect the case of all text throughout the description except bearing letters Line Paragraph Style If this toggle is on the program will output the description without carriage returns after each line This approach makes a nice paragraph style when brought into a word processor with word wrap If the toggle is cleared the program will place carriage returns at the end of each call Beg End 8 Reset This option resets the entire dialog box back to the original settings from the installation Minimum Procedure Outline Initiate Legal Description from the Tools menu Choose the Pick Boundary Polyline button and select desired polyline Choose OK and the boundary description will appear in the Report Viewer Standard Procedure Outline Initiate Legal Description from the Tools menu Choose the Pick Boundary Polyline button and select desired polyline Designate the Header Footer and Output file names Choose the appropriate button for the output you desire Choose OK to generate the boundary description Prerequisite closed polyline boundary Keyboard Command LEGAL Legal
223. nly the point symbol and node are drawn When you draw existing points with Point Numbers off the point attribute block is not drawn only the point symbol and node are drawn Automatic Point Numbering Uses the Starting Point Number for the first new point The next point number is automatically incremented Before storing the point the command checks whether the point number is used If the point number is used and point protect is on set in the Coordinate File Utilities command then the Draw Locate Points 173 command will prompt for another point number or to overwrite the point With Automatic Point Numbering off the command will prompt for the point numbers Determining Point Display and Layering Wild card match of point description You can display only points with specific descriptions This can be thought of as a filter In other words entering IP for Iron Pin would display only points that are labeled with the description IP The default is the asterisk which will display all points regardless of description Layer Name Allows you to designate a layer for the points to be displayed You can enter a new name or choose an existing layer by clicking Select Layer Any CSD point consists of a block insert with attributes a point symbol and a point entity The point entity is used for picking the point by OSNAP Node in other commands The block insert includes a point number elevation and description These
224. nsertion points choose the Symbol Pts button in the Edit Code Definition dialog box To activate symbol points use the command 2ND 3RD after the description e g CAR 2ND 3RD Then for a two point rotation and scale follow with a second point and description For a three point rotation and scaling allowing distortion of the dimensions scaling in two directions follow with a thrid point with description The shortened form CAR 2ND will initiate the symbol point logic in the case of a two point rotation and scale CAR ROT will rotate and scale a two point symbol definition By default the symbol insertion 1s defined by one point at the symbol center 0 0 A one point insertion definition can be used to insert a symbol offset from the center With a two insertion point definition the program will rotate and scale the symbol 1 e two insertion points can be used to insert a tree symbol to size the tree where the first point 1s for the tree center and the second is for the drip line With a three insertion point definition the program will rotate and scale the symbol in both X and Y i e three points can be used to insert a car symbol with the first point being the front driver side the second point as the back driver side to rotate and scale the length and the third as the back passenger side to scale the width Besides the insertion point coordinates you can define a description for each point used for the drawn p
225. nt code So a car would be drawn by a single point with description e g from point 45 Car 2ND46 46 in this example scales the car from point 45 to 46 according to the first two reference coordinates specified in the Symbol Points dialog The 3RD code is used to specify the third symbol insertion point Just as with the 2ND code a point number after the 3RD is optional The 2ND and 3RD codes should be assigned to the first point e g consider a code CAR with a three point symbol insertion definition If the first point has a description of CAR 2ND 3RD then point one will be used as the first symbol insertion point and the next two points with the CAR description will be used as the second and third symbol insertion points Field to Finish 163 Cover 1 Center g Center Back Pass Side Back Onver Side PointNo NMorthing Y Easting X Elev Z Description Prerequisite A data file of points with descriptions Keyboard Command fid2fin Chapter 5 Field to Finish 164 COGO Commands Inverse Function This command reports the bearing azimuth and horizontal distance between two points The command prompts for a series of points Use the appropriate object snap mode to select the points from the screen or use the point numbers to reference coordinates stored in the current coordinate database The results are then displayed Prompts Calculate Bearing amp Distance from starting point Trave
226. nt coordinate file You can also set the occupied point by using the Inverse command If you Inverse from point 3 to point 1 you set point 1 as the occupied point and point 3 as the backsight For more information refer the Inverse command section of this manual Prerequisite None Keyboard Command occpoint Traverse Function This command allows you to enter any combination of turned angles azimuths or bearings to define a traverse or figure e Traverse prompts for an Angle Bearing Code that defines the angle or bearing type Codes 1 through 4 define the bearing quadrants 1 being North East 2 South East 3 South West and 4 North West Code 5 is a north based azimuth 6 is an angle turned to the left 7 is an angle turned to the right 8 1s a deflection angle left and 9 1s a deflection angle right This command always occupies the last point it calculated and backsights the point before that N 5 A SX 8 E LEFT RIGHT NO 4 l Codes used for Codes used for Codes used for Codes used for BEARINGS AZIMUTHS Anales Deflection Angles LEFT amp RIGHT LEFT amp RIGHT Occupy Point 167 e For both the Angle Bearing Code and the Distance prompt you can enter point defined responses e g two points separated by an asterisk as in 2 3 for the bearing or distance defined by 2 to 3 You can also add math expressions For angles 2 3490 would deflect 90 degrees right from 2 to 3 For distance 2 3 2 would mea
227. nts contained in the coordinate file Enter the point number or range of points and select OK The points will be read into the rw5 file at the top of the file Add Point From Coordinate File X Point Range 1 105 Point 12 a el Elevation Adds an elevation EL record to the editor The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the file If so you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row Note Adds a note DS record to the editor Note records need to be added below the measurement record containing the foresight point that the note is intended for Traverse Name Adds a traverse name Name to the editor The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the file If so you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row GPS Adds a GPS record to the editor The new record will be insert above the row that contains the active cell unless this row is the last row in the file If so you will be prompted to insert above or below the current row Reference Azimuth Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine Control Standard Error Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine Edit Process Raw File 97 Setup Standard Error Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustmen
228. nu and choose C amp G Transfer 2 Select Send ASCII 3 In CSD leave the FILE fields blank Press the Download ASCII button to ready CSD to receive the file 4 In CGField select the ASCII file to send 5 After the transfer 1s complete you will see the file in the CSD editor You can then select FILE and SAVE or SAVEAS to save the ASCII file Sending a Coordinate File to CGField 1 In CGField select the UTILS menu and choose C amp G Transfer 2 Select Receive Coords to ready the data collector 3 In CSD leave the FILE fields blank Press the Upload Send Coordinates button Select the points to send 4 Press the Start Transfer button 5 CSD will send the file name to CGField and a coordinate file with the same name will be automatically created or opened in CGField 6 If the file exists you will be asked how you want to handle duplicate points e Overwrite e Don t Overwrite e Ask for each Point The point transfer will begin Convert CG RAW to CSD RW5 This utility allows you to convert a C amp G raw data file to a Carlson raw data file Select the C amp G RAW file to convert Then enter the file name of the destination Carlson RWS file Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw
229. nu such as Rotate Points and Translate Points if you want to do a coordinate rotation or translation Prompts This routine prompts for the twist angle then adjusts the screen and cross hairs to that angle This 1s a modification of AutoCAD s DVIEW command The twist angle is always measured counterclockwise with O degrees being to the east right Keyboard Command twistl Prerequisite None Twist Screen Line Polyline or Text Function This is a variation of the previous command that allows you to select a line polyline or text in your drawing that you want to be aligned parallel to the east west direction of the graphics screen Think of the entity you select as a pointer or arrow that will point in the east direction of the screen after you select it Select the line polyline or text closest to the end point which you want to be the horizontal or east direction of the screen Prompts Pick a line polyline or text to make horizontal pick a line or polyline Keyboard Command twist2 Prerequisite None Chapter 17 Twist Screen Commands 262 Twist Screen Surveyor Function This 1s another variation of twisting the screen that allows you to input an angle azimuth that you want to be aligned parallel to the east west direction of the graphics screen Prompts Angle to set to horizontal O This would align due north with respect to real world coordinates to the east or horizontal direction of the graphics screen Pre
230. nuous option the two vertices of the removed segments are averaged together to keep the polyline continuous When you specify the Break option the segment is left missing in the polyline resulting in two separate polylines Prompts 1 Break polyline at removal or keep continuous lt Break gt Continuous C 2 Select polyline segment to remove pick point on polyline segment Original Polyline Continuous Removal Break Removal Prerequisite A polyline Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 254 Keyboard Command REMOVEPL Remove Polyline Vertex Function This command allows you to remove the selected vertex from a polyline Prompts 1 Select polyline vertex to remove pick point on polyline 2 Select the vertex to remove Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command RMVERTEX Polyline Report Function This command generates a report of bearing distance and curve data for all the points along the selected polyline The closure is reported between the starting and ending points of the polyline The polyline area 1s also reported Prompts 1 Starting station lt 0 0 gt Press Enter 2 Decimal places lt 3 gt 2 3 Select polyline to report pick a polyline 4 Standard Report Viewer displays the report for the selected polyline 5 Select polyline to report Enter to End Press Enter Polyline Report 11 29 2002 04 09 NORTHING EASTING STATION BEARING DISTANCE 4094 21 8149 92 325 00 S 76 57 30 E 50 35
231. nying this EULA and may or may not include printed materials associated media and electronic documentation henceforth this software Exercising your right to use this software binds you to the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms contained herein do not use this software SOFTWARE LICENSE This software 1s protected by United States copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as applicable intellectual property laws and treaties This software is licensed not sold GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the following rights e You may install and use one copy of this software or any prior version for the same operating system on a single computer The primary user of the computer on which this software is installed may make a second copy for his or her exclusive use Additionally you may store one copy of this software on a storage device such as a network server used only to install or run this software on other computer over an internal network However you must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate computer on which this software is installed or run from the storage device A single license for this software may not be shared or used concurrently on more than one computer unless a license manager has been purchased from Carlson Software OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS e You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble this software except and only to the extent that such acti
232. o pick point number This prompt will not appear if the L option Label Text Only was selected 5 Pick point or point number Enter to End Press Enter Prerequisite A polyline centerline Keyboard Command offsta Offset Point Entry Function This command creates points along a centerline at specified stations and left and right offsets The centerline can be defined by a polyline centerline CL file or two points Offset Point Entry 207 Offset Point Settings Y Store Points to Coordinate File Lacate Points on Centerline Label Station amp Offsets Locate Intersection Points At Line Corners Beginning Station Centerline from 3 Polyline Points O CL File Reference Elevation 3D Polyline O Profile 9 None Input Station Offset from 8 Manual Entry CO Read File Offset Prompt O Both Left Right Single Offset station Type 8 1 00 05 1 000 5100 Type of Curve 8 Roadway O Railroad The Store Points to Coordinate File option will store any points the the current coordinate CRD file This includes centerline points and offset points When Locate Points on Centerline is checked the program will locate points along the centerline otherwise just the offset points will be created When Label Stations amp Offsets is checked the program will label the station offset as the point description at tribute When Locate Intersection Points At Line Corners is checked
233. obvious that there is work to do Some of the zigzag polylines should probably start and stop We may not have applied the proper start stop logic First review the coordinates by going to List Points and selecting List All Scroll down to look at for example points 4050 to 7009 Planned Field to Finish 45 20 List Points Printing Point List Enable Filtering List All Points Point List Entry 7042 7067 7069 7074 7076 7117 7120 7131 7134 7238 7240 7281 7283 7300 Case sensitive Matching Raw Desc Matching Point Groups Include Exclude Summary List Number 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 7000 7001 7002 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 Northing 363948 55 363948 05 363952 06 363952 55 363950 36 363849 51 363845 03 363844 57 363869 22 363868 34 363816 40 363922 03 363920 89 363919 42 363920 34 36391 7 67 363916 79 Easting 307301 00 307302 76 307303 92 307302 16 307302 35 307439 73 307459 32 307459 24 307370 89 307343 74 307335 18 307371 05 307374 72 307381 46 307378 79 307377 86 307380 60 Elevation 43 61 43 61 43 61 43 61 43 52 44 96 44 95 47 79 44 89 44 23 44 30 44 22 44 38 44 43 44 41 44 43 44 44 D P 2 build List Create Group Raw Desc EP ST EP EP RECT SG BLC3 ST BLC3 BLC3 BLC ST LP LP SC ST FORI FORD EC St EC EE EC CLS Full Desc EP ST ER EP RECT SG BLC3 ST BLC3 BLC3 BLC
234. ocess Raw Data File command This file can be used to perform coordinate adjustments The compass rule crandall rule transit rule angle balance adjustment and least square adjustment commands are all available See Edit Process Raw Data File for more information Store to Deed File When checked data entered will be written to a deed PDD file This file can be processed later to correct errors create deed reports or to redraw the deed To use this option set the deed file name by picking the Specify File Name button Also set the Deed Name field Deed Name Specify the beginning deed name This option is only available when Store to Deed File is selected Specify Deed File Name Before specifying the deed PDD file name choose New or Append Revise from the Deed File Parameters below Only available when Store to Deed File is checked on Prompts 1 Pick point or point Number 1 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 8000 00 12000 00 0 00 In this example the coordinate for point number one has already been stored in the project point database with the Draw Locate Points command Exit Curve Bearing Qdd mmss gt 145 3035 Varas Poles Chains Distance 210 5 Enter Point Elevation lt gt 396 25 Enter Point Description lt gt ip Enter P to input a distance in Pole format or C for Chains format Exit Curve Bearing Qdd mmss gt C Enter C to traverse through a curve Radius 1103 5 9 C
235. ocess Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion is also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Chapter 3 Data Collectors 76 Data Collectors Ti Chapter 3 Data Collectors 78 Edit Process Raw File Edit Process Raw File Functions This program reads or creates a raw data RW5 file that contains various lines of data records that could be likened to a surveyor s field book You can specify point coordinates job information notes and the angles and distances that make up traverse or sideshots records Once the raw data 1s created or read 1t can be processed reduced to coordinates that are stored in the current point database The raw file can also be created or appended using the Locate Point Traverse Sideshot and Inverse commands To store the data inputs from these commands into a raw file first toggle on the Raw File ON OFF command on the Cogo menu It is possible to always have the raw data file open to store data inputs To enable this option choose Configure Carlson Survey Desktop and turn on the Automatic Raw File toggle in this dialog The raw files created by TDS data collector programs are also compatible without conversion The command Data Collectors on the Tools menu has options for reading other data collectors native file formats and converting them to raw data RW5 format Within the raw data editor the File menu includes an import menu for converting raw data from
236. ode system With reactive Field to Finish you assign instructions to whatever codes were found You make a new code table with each job read in the descriptions used assign linework symbols and layers then plot out the results The process still saves much time over standard point plotting followed by line by line and symbol by symbol drafting It is one step on the way to maximum efficiency as illustrated below Point Plotting Reactive Fiel d to Fini zh Coded Piel d to Finish No dernands on No demand on field Requires strategic Held crew no extra crew Signi icarnt coding by field crew benefits to benefits to Major benefits to dratting design drafting design drafing desi gn Landfill Point File Carlson Survey Desktop includes an ASCII file called Tutorial txt with the software package The file is found in a subdirectory of Autodesk Land Desktop which for Autodesk Land Desktop 2004 would be C Program Files Land Desktop 20041 SurveyDesktop Data This is a file of survey points in the form Pt N E Z D D for description This file might represent a typical survey conducted by an outside firm under contract where you are not able to instruct the crew how to code their survey shots In this instance your only option is to deal with whatever descriptions codes they used to describe the points New Project Chapter 2 Tutorials 20 Choose Create Project to start a new Project and name 1t Tutoriall as shown
237. oint description for prompting in the Insert Multi Point Symbol command See a three point symbol example below Define Symbol Placement Points A Description Point 1 Front Driver Side 4 T Back Drreer Side Point 3 T ZE 2 OF Help PI rna na p NT m D m 7 4 2 9 10 2 2 9 P 7 4 2 9 The coordinates for the insertion point definitions are for the symbol at unit size To figure these coordinates you will need to open the symbol drawing DWG file By default the symbols are located in the CSD SUP directory e g to make an insertion point for the tree drip line open the tree symbol drawing and find the coordinate at the edge of the tree symbol in this case 0 5 0 0 Shown below is a two point symbol example Chapter 5 Field to Finish 162 Define Symbol Placement Points 5 T Description Point 3 Ok Cancel Help I IT 0 0 0 0 Ic 0 5 0 0 Not all of the symbol insertion points need to be used when drawing the points If a code definition has three insertion points it is possible to use only one or two There are special codes to associate multiple points to the same symbol The first code point is used as the first symbol insertion point The 2ND code is used to specify the second symbol insertion point A point number can follow the 2ND to identify a specific point Without the point number the program will use the next point with the curre
238. oints command Prompts 1 Select points from screen or by point number Screen Number Enter 2 Point numbers to erase 5 3 Delete points from coordinate file Yes lt No gt Y Erased 1 point from file Erased 1 point from drawing Prerequisite Points to erase Keyboard Command DELPT Chapter 7 Point Commands 186 Edit Process Level Data Edit Process Level Data Function This command is for entering level data It has a spreadsheet editor for entering this information and the level calculations are updated as the data is entered There is also a processing and reporting feature This routine runs the lev file editor and x lev file report functions If you are creating a new LEV file you must choose either single wire or three wire for your level format data entry preference Level Format 3 Format choice box Level Editor LEV C d settings Scott langbeiny Wesk top Data Pg 207 lev CRD ge Sead 2t uD bass ee crd EL EL 100 en Bs Tl 00 EL e 106 840 a o i EL Ties 50 TP4 240 JEL 0 anion 106 208 E lod O eee Je JH Level File Editor dialog Chapter 8 Edit Process Level Data 188 SurvCADD Edit c scadZ005 USER scadrprt tmp File Edit Settings zx 4 OB Open Save Prnt Ext Find ide Adjust Elevations 3 21 2005 16 05 Level File gt C Documents and Settings Scott Langbein Desktop Data pg20 lev Measured Closing Elevation 107 440 Reference Closing Ele
239. on 204 Enter Assign Point 175 Entities to Polylines 223 Erase 170 Erase Points 170 Extend 219 Extend by Distance 219 Factor 266 Field to Finish 136 273 Field to Finish 2 3 23 26 30 31 36 38 40 47 48 52 54 56 58 61 62 135 141 150 151 156 158 Field to Finish from Coordinate Data 26 File Editor 107 114 Fillet 218 Find Bad Angle 133 Geodimeter 98 99 112 GPS 55 112 127 130 154 Grid 123 126 260 280 Header 210 216 Help 289 Hinged Area 239 Info 15 Information 72 Inquiry 22 Insert Symbols 198 Installing Carlson Survey Desktop 5 Intersections 179 Interval Along Entity 189 Inverse 170 Inverse with Area 235 Inverse with Area 234 235 Join 43 156 219 223 Join Nearest 218 Join Nearest 3 41 43 Label 166 172 234 236 238 245 246 Label Station Offset 244 Label Elevations 192 Label Zeros 167 Layer 36 40 144 147 150 165 167 193 194 204 235 245 Layers 23 145 165 193 LDD 56 64 least squares 2 64 70 72 73 77 129 130 231 259 278 Legal Description 209 Legal Description Writer 209 213 214 Leica 91 93 Length 206 License Copyright 1x License Agreement ix 13 Line 34 38 58 93 115 133 140 141 144 147 149 174 176 204 205 208 209 211 215 224 235 23 Line On Off 176 Index 274 LISCAD 93 Locate on Real Z Axis 166 179 190 192 Locate Point 22 106 164 168 169
240. option for reporting the missing points in the Compare Points dialog shown below Compare Points Fa Range of Points to compare Highest Point Number 6 Range of Points to Compare e Report Missing Points From Design Report Missing Points From Survey Cancel This generates the following report Cut Sheet 11 29 2002 02 25 Survey Coordinate File c CarlsonOEM exist data points mdb Design Coordinate File gt C CarlsonOEM design data points mdb Survey Design Pt Elevation Elevation Delta X Delta Y Cut Fill Description Cut Sheet 215 1 3511 400 3519 340 0 000 0 000 F7 940 fill 2 Missing From CRD File 2 3 3499 000 3502 110 0 000 0 000 F3 110 fill e If the Station Offset method is selected as an Input Method only the final grade elevations are produced in the report This is useful for writing final grades on the stakes prior to taking field shots You are first prompted for the desired offset and starting station as shown in the Station Offset dialog below and then obtain a report of final grades only Station Offset E Starting Station Offset Cut Sheet 11 29 2002 02 55 PT Station Offset ElevationGrade Cut Fill Desc PP 0 000 R0 000 3663 288 PP 0 50 0 RO 000 3662 031 PP 1 00 0 R0 000 3660 800 PP 1 50 0 R0 000 3633 005 PP 2 00 00 R0 000 3652 743 e When comparing points in the same file the Points to Compare dialog appears shown below which includes the option to assign
241. ordinates both the ground distances and the grid distances are displayed The grid elevation and combined factor are displayed in this section of the report The horizontal angles with and without the t T correction applied is displayed The t T correction is usually not significant unless the angle measurements encompass a large area or the survey is of a high order Network Least Squares 55 Unadjusted observations control Coordinates 2 observations 0 Fixed Points 0 Approx Points Sta M E STErr NM StErr E 501 203743 569 78660686 055 0 0070 0 0010 505 205988 320 36686 0553 0 000 0 000 Distances 25 observations From Sta To Sta Ground Dist Sterr 501 1053 44 750 O QOZO 501 502 Olas O 0088 502 1053 16 450 Q 00590 Angles 31 observations BS Sta Occ Sta FS Sta Angle StErr Sec 505 SaL 102 060 12 14 17 53 50L 502 503 101 0706 18 6 501 5053 502 341 19 24 8 60 Grid Distances 25 observations From Sta To Sta Grid Dist Grid Factor 2 Factor combined Factor 501 1053 44 712 O 99988817 0 9909090905820 0 9998464 501 502 79 865 O 99988808 O 99995854 0 99984662 16 42 O 5956588818 0 9599578 0 99984606 302 303 Grid Horizontal Angles 31 observations BS Sta Occ Sta FS Sta Angle StErr sec t T 503 50L 502 060 12 14 17 3 o 0 101 0705 18 6 0 0 301 302 305 Adjusted Coordinates The next section of the report shows the final adjusted coordinates Additionally the computed standard errors o
242. orrection ON Maximum iterations 10 convergence Limit 0 001000 1983 State Plane Coordinates zone 3200 North Carolina Elevations factor computed from raw data elevations Elevation Units US Feet Horizontal Units Meters Angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 503 BS 5301 FS 307 Low 211 54 35 High 211 55 20 Diff 000 00 45 angle spread exceeds tolerance IP 505 BS 501 FS 508 Low 215 11 46 High 215 12 20 Diff ooo o0 34 vertical Distance from 501 to 503 exceeds tolerance Low 27 451 High 28 038 Diff 0 587 vertical Distance from 501 to 502 exceeds tolerance Low 13 442 High 13 859 Diff 0 418 Unadjusted Measurements The following excerpt from the report shows the unadjusted measurements Measurements consist of some combi nation of control X and Y horizontal distances horizontal angles and azimuth measurements These measurements consist of a single averaged measurement For example if multiple distances were collected between two points only the single averaged measurement is used in the least squares adjustment Also standard errors for the measurements are displayed in this section of the report The standard errors are computed from the standard error setting in the Settings dialog box using error propagation formulas The standard error of an angle that was measured several times would typically be lower than an angle that was measured only once Since this data was adjusted into NAD 83 co
243. ort by Stations Allows you to sorts the output report by station number 8 Station Type The label format is assigned 1 00 Stationing is drawn in the format 1 00 14000 Stationing is drawn in the format 1 000 100 Stationing is drawn in the format 100 9 Under the Type of Curve you set the type of curve Roadway Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve Railroad Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length based on 100 foot chord segments Prompts When using a 3D polyline for the grade elevation the program calculates the elevation along the polyline at the position perpendicular from the point For grid and triangulation surface files the design elevation is determined by the surface file at the point With section files the grade elevation is interpolated from the offset elevation data in the section file based on the station offset of the point along the centerline The Points option reports the horizontal distance and cut fill between two points The points to compare can be in the current project point database or separate point database files For the same point database option two ranges of point numbers are compared For the separate file option the point numbers are used to match points between the files If point numbers are missing in the comparison e g points to 3 in the current coordinate file are being compared to points 1 and 3 in the design coordinate file there is an
244. ory by the field crews Planned Field to Finish 39 e Tutorial2 TXT 1s a sample coordinate file that must be imported and then can be plotted automatically using Field to Finish Importing the Points versus Data Collector Download For the purpose of this Tutorial we will use imported ASCII coordinate files point files Use the standard Im port Export Points command found in the Points menu In actual practice you will typically download points from a data collector used by the field crew The very first command in the Carlson Survey Desktop CSD pulldown menu titled Survey and located near the far right of your menu options 1s Data Collectors This Data Collectors command loads the points from all collector types listed in the dialog box below Data Collector Programs BurvLE F astSurveeu IZ LG Field S MI Sokkia SDA Surveyors Assistant Leica Mikan Geodimeter Topcon 21031 0220GPT 2000 Cancel Some of these options apply to hardware based data collection such as the on board built in collectors on total stations supplied by Leica and Topcon Other options apply to software brands such as Carlson SurvCE TDS and SMI CSD will download these types from a variety of hardware platforms You can download with coordinates points and raw files When downloading raw files of survey data the default form is the RW5 file but using the SurvCE option you can convert to the more familiar Autodesk Land
245. oved 1 Reduce Perimeter Pass 6 Removed 0 Create 2D or 3D Polyline lt 2D gt 3D 2D Keyboard Command swplines Prerequisite Entities Erase by Closed Polyline Function This tool is used to cleanup drawing geometry at the extents of a polyline boundary It provides options to erase adjacent geometry as well as trim geometry crossing the fence of the polyline Erase by Closed Polyline 247 First select the boundary polyline only one can be selected Designate the desired options in the following dialog The top section allows you to toggle which object types should be affected by the operation Note that some objects such as text and inserts cannot be trimmed Select Entity Types To Clip X e Polylines e Arcs Iv 3D Faces Iv Text IM Solids Points Lines Inserts Leaders Dimensions Auto select entities to clip a Erase Outside Cancel In the middle of the dialog is a toggle that determines whether to prompt for objects to process If you want to isolate the drawings contents to that of the selected polyline turn this toggle on Note that all geometry in the drawing 1s effected even that outside of the current viewport Many users will prefer to turn this toggle off so they will be prompted to manipulate the geometry The bottom row allows you to choose whether to erase all the entities on the inside or outside of the polyline Keyboard Command erasepline Prerequisite Entities and a closed poly
246. ow containing the active cursor or cell You can delete a row by placing the cursor in any of the cells in the row that you wish to delete or by picking on the row number at the far left of the editor Modify Measurements This option allows for a change in distance horizontal angle or vertical angle by a specified amount for the entire file or for a specified point number or line number range To modify a measurement choose which field to modify enter the change in either distance or angle in dd mmss format Next choose how to apply the modification If all 1s selected the change will be applied to all records in the specified field If By Point Number is chosen enter the point number or range of numbers in the Range of Points field If by Line Number is chosen then define the area for the change by specifying the Starting and Ending line Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 88 Modify Measurements Field To Modify Horizontal Angle C Vertical Angle Change To Distance Apply To C All By Point Number 8 By Line Number Range af Points Start Line End Line 15 Display Menu EZ Vertical Distance d Graphics d Spreadsheet Colors Hide ROW Show ROW Hide Description Records 4 Show Description Records Hide Record Headers Show Record Headers Vertical The options contained in this menu allow for specifying the type of vertical measurement information
247. plays or in the area labels Use Commas in Labels Allows you to use commas in the area labels Layer for area text Assigns a layer for the area text Style for area text Sets a text style Area text size scaler Sets the text size to appropriate scale Max gap to join Area by Lines and Arcs Use this option during Area by Lines amp Arcs command When connecting lines and arcs that define the perimeter this command will join endpoints if the dis tance between the two points is less than the specified gap Otherwise the program will report an error and will not report an area Different Radius Tolerance Checks the difference between the PC Radius and PT Radius on curves If the difference between these distances is greater than this tolerance an accurate area calculation cannot occur and the command displays a warning Prerequisite None Keyboard Command DEFAREA Chapter 13 Area Commands 226 Inverse with Area Function This command generates a report of the bearing and horizontal distance between a series of points The report also includes the northing easting and station of each point and calculates the area of the closed figure defined by the points Curve data can also be entered and reported e Inverse with Area creates a polyline of the figure which can be erased or kept in the drawing The points can be either picked on the screen or entered by point number e You can also enter
248. plied by Ellipse Scale Factor to make the ellipse larger for easier viewing Process Options Report Angle Format Bearing C Azimuth O Angle Right 0 By File Calculate Elevations 3 Al SideShots Only O None I Report SideShots Decimal Places for Report 0 000 wv Use Report Formatter The least squares process report shows the input data and the results For each point the amount adjusted and the standard error in X and Y are reported The Reference Standard Deviation is based on the sum of the residuals and the initial estimated standard errors The Chi Squares test is a goodness of fit test that checks the reference standard deviation with the least squares model If this test fails there may be a blunder in the measurement data or the initial estimated standard errors were too low or too high Stadia Processing Method Provides functionality to process Stadia surveying notes Stadia sighting depends on two horizontal cross hairs known as stadia hairs within the telescope These hairs are parallel to the horizontal cross hair and are equally spaced above and below it The distance between the two stadia hairs is known as the intercept The distance from the instrument to the rod is 100 times the intercept For example an intercept of 3 10 would represent a distance of 310 3 10 X 100 For entering in stadia notes you would enter the horizontal angle the distance entered as the intercept X 100 and the vertical angle
249. pplied before the actual description Suffix General term applied after the actual description Unknown The text designated here will be placed in the description if the program does not find a valid description at that coordinate location The words Unknown Point may be used 6 Area Reporting The Legal Description Writer can output several types of areas Basic options include beginning and ending terms In the large table of area options choose the items you wish to report in the order you want them to appear by placing a number in the sequence field indicating the desired order Make sure you do not enter duplicate numbers You can edit the prefix suffix for each and control decimal precision of each field output Area Reporting General Prefix having an area of SeqH Pref Suffix Precision save E 000 y same JD EE smes d 000 y sa E SauseKionsien 000 oed E Sd 000 y n aaee 000 7 General Suffis INMEREBA Pd 1 Cancel Help 7 General This option controls general specifications which can affect the entire description Each item is explained in detail below Chapter 9 Deed Commands 202 General 5pecs xl Body of Description Beginning at a which is the point of beginning Reference Line General Prefis Case ls Mone Upper f Lower Proper Line Paragraph Style W Use Paragraph Format in Output File 1 E Cancel Help Body of Description Enter the begin
250. r distance from points to property line Keyboard Command dimentxt Prerequisite Line or polyline Building Dimensions Function This command labels the length of line and polyline segments The label is located in the middle of the line or polyline segment The options for Building Dimensions are set in the Survey Text Defaults command One option labels all the segments of a closed polyline with one pick of the polyline Otherwise the procedure is to pick a line or polyline segment and then choose an alignment Depending where the alignment point is picked the label is drawn either perpendicular or parallel above or below the line Prompts Pick Line or Polyline pick line or polyline segment to label Pick alignment pick point as shown Keyboard Command bldgtext Prerequisite Line or polyline Chapter 14 Survey Text Commands 236 Adjoiner Text Function This command draws text that is aligned with the selected line or polyline segment The layer style size and justification for the text is set in the Survey Text Defaults command To align text that is already drawn use the Rotate Text command found in the Edit menu Prompts Pick Line or Polyline pick a line or polyline for alignment Starting point pick a point to start the text Text MAIN STREET Adjoiner Text aligns text with a line or polyline Keyboard Command adjntext Prerequisite Line or polyline Create Point Table Function This command draws a ta
251. r fillet radius lt 10 00 gt press Enter Select first polyline segment pick a segment of a polyline Select second polyline segment pick an adjoining segment of the same polyline Select first polyline segment Enter to End pressEnter Keyboard Command fillet3d Prerequisite 3D polyline Entities to Polylines Function This command converts selected lines arcs circles 3Dfaces and solids into individual polylines Use Join Nearest to convert adjoining lines and arcs into continuous polylines Prompts Filet 3D Polyline 249 1 Select lines arcs circles 3Dfaces and solids to convert 2 Select objects pick entities Prerequisite Lines arcs or other entities to convert Keyboard Command TOPLINE Text Explode To Polylines Function This command converts the selected text into polylines Prompts Select text to be EXPLODED Select objects select the text 1 text object s have been exploded to lines The line objects have been placed on layer 0 Reading the selection set Joining Converting Keyboard Command textexp Prerequisite Text Draw Polyline Blips Function This command will draw temporary markers blips at each polyline vertex This allows you to identify the actual location of each vertex e The Blips are temporary Any change to the viewport pan zoom regen will make the blips disappear In later versions of AutoCAD you can also click on the polyline to activate the grips whi
252. r joining the perimeter and labeling the area are defined in Area Defaults e One of the settings is the maximum gap size to join If a gap is greater than this gap tolerance the area 1s not reported and the program displays a temporary X symbol at the gap Prompts 1 Select lines and arcs or polylines of perimeter for area calculation 2 Select Objects select lines and arcs or polylines The lines and arcs are then joined together and the area is Inverse with Area 227 calculated 3 Enter pick Label center point pick point The area is then plotted at the point selected Selection Point 6 A Selection Point 5 ae First Selection Point d Near object snap is suggested Selection Point 2 Pn me e i ere Point 3 Prerequisite Lines arcs or polylines on screen Keyboard Command JOINAREA Area by Interior Point Function This command calculates and labels the area of the perimeter surrounding a selected interior point e The AutoCAD Boundary command is used to find the perimeter Generally this command will only work on closed or overlapping objects Use Area by Lines amp Arcs for other applications Prompts 1 Pick point inside area perimeter Select a point 2 Pick area label centering point Select a point The area is then plotted at the point selected Keyboard Command ptarea Prerequisite Set Area Label Defaults File Name sp ptarea lsp Area by Closed Polylines
253. r subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable The manufacturer is Carlson Software Inc 102 W Second St Maysville KY 41056 LIMITED WARRANTY CARLSON SOFTWARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY EITHER EXPRESSED OR IM PLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT REGARDING THESE MATE RIALS CARLSON SOFTWARE MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN AS IS BASIS IN NO EVENT SHALL CARLSON SOFTWARE BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL COLLAT ERAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THESE MATERIALS THIS INCLUDES WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS IN ALL INSTANCES THE EXCLU SION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IS SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE JURISDICTION IF THIS SOFTWARE WAS ACQUIRED IN THE UNITED STATES THIS EULA IS GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF KENTUCKY IF THIS PRODUCT WAS ACQUIRED OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES THIS EULA IS GOVERNED BY THE LAWS IN ANY APPLICABLE JURIS DICTION Chapter 1 Product Overview 16 17 Chapter 1 Product Overview 18 Tutorials Field to Finish from Coordinate Data Reactive Field to Finish Field to Finish is used to create a partial or nearly complete
254. r this attribute is labeled with the point inserts Notes Works with the note file not associated with the current coordinate file The note file contains unlimited point descriptions in addition to the fixed 32 character point descriptions in the coordinate file When you create points with Notes on the command will prompt you for point notes to be stored with the point When you draw existing points with Notes on any notes associate with these points are drawn as text entities below the point description Elevations Determines whether or not you are prompted for elevations for each point when creating new points When you are placing both new and existing points Elevations determine whether this attribute is labeled with the point inserts Use Labels the positive elevations with a leading e g 159 43 Use Labels the negative elevations with a leading Locate on Real Z Axis Determines if the points are placed at their elevations or at zero elevation Label Zeros When the Elevations option is on Label Zeros identifies points with zero elevation When Elevations is not on only points with nonzero elevation are labeled Point Number Settings Under Point Number Settings you determine how points will numbered Point Numbers Determines whether the complete point block is drawn or just the symbol and node When you create new points with Point Numbers off no points are stored in the current coordinate file o
255. re SDR code 13 AT codes to the point note NOT for the point database Uploading Data Collectors 71 Point data from the current project point database can be uploaded into the SDR 1 Select the Communications command in the SDR main menu Choose Data Format SDR 2 In CSD run Data Collection choose Sokkia SDR Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 3 Select the Upload button A Sokkia Options dialog appears for setting the job parameters for the file to be created on the collector Be sure to choose the Distance Unit that matches your coordinate file meters US feet or international feet 4 Click OK The next dialog allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload 5 Before clicking the Start Transfer button for range of points go to the SDR and hit the Receive function key The SDR is now waiting to receive 6 Return to CSD and click Start Transfer on the range of point dialog Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion is also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Communication Settings Besides matching the baud rate between CSD and the collector make sure that the collector is
256. re determined based on the current point layer instead of the default attribute layer names The layer names for these attributes begin with the current point layer followed by the attribute name e g if the point layer is UTIL the attribute layers will be UTILMARK UTILNO UTILELEV and UTILDESC Chapter 7 Point Commands 184 Symbols Only the point symbol itself will take on the name of the current layer e g UTILMARK is created but all other attribute layers would be PNTNO PNTELEV and PNTDESC Both The block reference layer will be unique UTIL but point attributes will PNTNO PNTELEV etc 6 Under Layer Name for Points you must specify the layer name for the points After choosing the correct settings select OK The Create Points from Entities dialog box will appear Create Points from Entities Ed Entities to Process e Polvlines v Lines e Arcs Points Faces v Inserts Text Entity Layer For D escription e Avoid Duplicates With Existing Pts Cancel Help Entities to Process Select the types of entities you wish to process Entity Layer for Description Allows you to use the layer name of the entity as the description for the created point Avoid Duplicates with Existing Points Allows you to prevent creation of a point if a point with the same coordinates already exists in the current coordinate file 7 Select arcs faces points text lines and
257. re for registering your software license Change keys are no longer given over the telephone 1 Please choose one of the following registration methods e Form This method allows you to fill out a form that you can print and fax or mail to Carlson Software for registration Internet If your computer is online you may register automatically over the Internet Your information is sent to Carlson Software validated and returned in just a few seconds If you are using a dial up connection please establish this connection before attempting to register Enter change key Choose this method after receiving your change key from Carlson Software if you previ ously used the Form method above Register Later You may run CSD for up to thirty 30 days before you are required to register Choose this method if you want to register later After you choose the registration method press Next Authorizing Carlson Survey Desktop 9 Registration Wizard E Reg Method Install Into User Info Authorize Reason for Installation New install or maintenance upgrade of Carlson Software C Home use See License Agreement C Re installation of Carlson Software C Windows or AutoCAD Upgrade C New Hardware new hard drive network card new computer 2 Determine the reason for installation The first time you install CSD is the only time you will select New install All subsequent installations require a choice from the remaining options
258. re it The key combination Ctrl Z also performs this action Select All Selects all the text in the report viewer Cut Deletes the selected text and places it on the Windows clipboard Copy Copies the selected text to the Windows clipboard Paste Inserts ASCII text from the Windows clipboard into the report viewer at the cursor Search Opens the Find Text dialog allowing you to search for specific items in the report viewer Replace Opens the Find and Replace Text dialog Allows you to search for text and replace it Options Opens the Report Viewer Options dialog In this dialog you can specify print settings such as lines per page and margins You can also specify the font used for both the display and for printing Hide Minimizes the report viewer window and returns to AutoCAD This allows you to continue working in AutoCAD without closing the report You can re examine the report at any time by selecting the minimized report viewer icon License Copyright Chapter 1 Product Overview 14 Copyright 02005 Carlson Software Inc All Rights Reserved Use of this software indicates acceptance of the terms and conditions of the Software License Agreement Carlson Survey Desktop End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement henceforth EULA is a legal agreement between you the individual or single entity henceforth you and Carlson Software Inc henceforth Carlson Software for the software accompa
259. refix to station labels Station Suffix Assigns a suffix to station labels Right Offset Prefix Assigns a prefix to right offset labels Right Offset Suffix Assigns a suffix to right offset labels Left Offset Prefix Assigns a prefix to left offset labels Left Offset Suffix Assigns a suffix to left offset labels 5 Station Label the label can be abbreviated e Full Labels the full station e Partial Labels a partial station e g at station 5 89 the label would be 89 the characters after the sign None No station is labeled only the offset 6 Offset Label abbreviates the label Full Labels the full offset value Partial Labels a partial offset e g at offset R 34 8 the label is 34 8 The Offset Label Partial will drop the L for left or R for right from the label None No offset is labeled only the station 7 Station type Assigns the label format e 1400 Stationing is drawn in the format 14 00 e 14 000 Stationing is drawn in the format 1 000 100 Stationing is drawn in the format 100 8 Centerline By Chooses the entity The centerline labeled is either from a polyline or a horizontal alignment Prompts 1 The Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations 2 Select Polyline Centerline pick the polyline centerline 3 Pick point or point number Enter to End pick a point Station gt 210 91 Offset 57 36 Right 4 Select point number to add station description t
260. requisite None Keyboard Command twist3 Restore Due North Function This command twists the screen to make due north vertical Keyboard Command twist4 Prerequisite None Twist Screen Surveyor 263 Chapter 17 Twist Screen Commands 264 Conversion Commands Convert Points Function This group of commands converts point formats 1 Import Point File These commands read point data from other formats into the Autodesk Land Desk top point database for the current project The supported import formats are C amp G Carlson SurvCADD Carlson Survey Geodimeter Leica and TDS 2 Export Point File These commands write point from the current Autodesk Land Desktop project into other point file formats The supported export formats are C amp G Carlson SurvCADD Carlson Survey Geodimeter Leica and TDS 3 Convert Point Objects These commands convert the drawing point entities between Autodesk Land Desktop AECC_POINT entities and Carlson SurvCADD Carlson Survey CSD point blocks Import Softdesk Centerline Function These commands convert centerlines from the current Land Desktop project into Carlson Leica and Sokkia format files The commands first prompt to select an LDD centerline from a list of centerlines defined in the current project Then the program prompts for the file name of the new format to create Keyboard Command ldd2c1 wildcll cl2sdr Prerequisite alignments in the current project Chapt
261. rified you can send and receive data by going directly to the screen shown below Return to the COMM PARAMETERS selection screen which displays the following 3 options e Fl SEND DATA e F2 LOAD DATA e F3 COMM PARAMETERS Press F2 to LOAD DATA Then press Fl to select COOR DATA The program on the Topcon will ask you to enter a file name You must enter this name on the Topcon instrument using the 4 function keys to access letters and numbers This will be the name of the file that you will use for stakeout If you entered a name such as 11 or Smith or whatever you choose your coordinate file on the PC will be converted to this name as it stored on the Topcon LOAD COOR DATA OK F3 YES Press F3 The instrument will say Waiting Data At this point you need to be in the Topcon data transfer option There you pick Upload or prior to picking upload you can specify your coordinate file name as shown below After Upload is clicked you specify the point range to send and click OK You have a certain amount of time within the Waiting Data mode to start sending the data over to the Topcon instrument Data Collectors 75 a A WORT IO E TETTE UE UC GC E e D ET TNT a E n Topcon 210 310 220 GPT2000 Data Collection Topcon File Select File Cason CRD Fl Carlson RWS File Points to Transfer Highest Point Humber 18 Range of Points When all the selected coordinates are transferred it will say Completed on the PC At
262. rse Sideshot Options Arc Point number or pick point 2072 Use point number 2072 as an example PtNo Northing y Easting x Elev z Description 2072 4028 83 8229 35 394 49 B Traverse Sideshot Options Arc Point number or pick point 2070 Use point number 2070 PtNo Northing y Easting x Elev z Description 2070 4037 31 8253 02 394 61 B Bearing N 70d17 36 E Horizontal Distance 25 1385978 Traverse and Sideshot The Inverse command can be used in conjunction with the Traverse and Sideshot commands The last two points you specify become the Backsight and the Occupied point for the Traverse and Sideshot commands You can go directly from the Inverse command to the Traverse and Side shots command Enter T to go directly to the Traverse command Enter SS or S to go directly to the Side shots command Even a single S will transmit to Sideshot Hot keys are not case sensitive Options Several input options for Inverse are set by entering O for Options Sideshot Inverse Sideshot inverse holds the current occupied point and calculates the bearing distance to each entered point When the Pairs option is set Inverse reports the bearing distance between pairs of points instead of every entered point e g if points 1 2 11 12 were entered the bearing distance would be reported for 1 2 and 11 12 but not 2 11 The Auto Increment option uses the next point number when you press Enter To exit the command with Auto Increment active enter End
263. s Coordinate System Input Files Preprocessing Standard Erors Adjustment Output Options Instrument and Target Standard Errors Eoo 0 005 Instrument Centering pos Target Height 10 100 Height of Instrument 0 100 Direction Azimuth Standard Error sec E Avg Dist to BS F5 Collimation Err sec 50 000 Rod Read Er per 100 ft m BOO Standard errors SE are basically realistic errors you would expect to obtain based on the type equipment and field procedures used to take your measurements e g if you are using a 5 second theodolite you could expect the angles to be measured within 5 seconds The Distance Angle Reading Vertical and Horizontal and PPM settings should be based on the equipment being used Check the published specifications for your total station Survey methods should also be taken into account when setting standard errors e g you might set the Target Centering standard error higher when you are sighting a held prism pole than you would if you were sighting a prism set on a tripod If the generated report shows that generally you have consistently high Standard Residuals for a particular measurement value angles distances etc then there is the chance that you have selected standard errors that are better than your instrument and methods can obtain See explanation of report file Note The settings from this dialog box will be used for the project default settings The
264. s Prerequisite A centerline CL file polyline or two points Calculate Offsets Function This command calculates the station and offsets of point coordinates from a centerline The points used to calculate the offsets can be stored in the current project point database or picked on the screen e When picking points the station and offset of the current position of the cross hairs is displayed in the lower screen menu e The centerline can be defined by either a polyline by two point numbers or by centerline CL file Calculate Offsets 209 Calculate Offset Settings Beginning Station Maximum Offset to Calc 1000 00 Report Offsets Shead Behind Centerline Label Station and Offsets Sort Report by Stations Report Point Coordinates Use Report Formatter Round Stations Rounding Interval 1 000 Store Station Text to CAD File amp s C Description Frefis C Description Suffix f None Report Grade Elevation From C Polpline f Triangulation Define Centerline by Polpline Points C Alignment Station Type 1400 C 14000 C 100 ES oon Type of Curve f Roadway 7 Railroad Cancel Help 1 Calculate Offset Settings Beginning Station Specify the starting station of the centerline When using a centerline CL file this field is not available Maximum Offset to Calc Specify the maximum distance the program should look when calculating an offset
265. s Reading Error sec Pointing Error sec Target Centering Error ft 0200 Instrument Centering Error Et 0200 EDM Constant Error IE 0200 EDM Scaler Error ppm 0 0 r Load Save E Cancel Help l al al eai ES The program will calculate the weights for each distance and angle measurement using these measurement errors The control points points to adjust distance and angle measurements with weights are reported You can edit these measurements and weights using the Edit Least Squares Data routine or go directly to the Process Least Squares Data routine Edit Least Squares Data This routine edits the points measurements and weights stored in the LSQ file associated with the current RW5 file The editor works through the dialog shown You can edit add or remove the control points adjust points angle measurements or distance measurements The program does not check that the editing is valid So you need to make sure that your changes keep a good set of least squares data i e don t delete a needed control point The Distance Error button allows you to set the distance standard error weights for all the distance measurements to the same value Likewise the Angle Error button sets the standard error weights for all the angle measurements Control Points Edit Least Squares Data Control Paints Point North 3000 00000 3000 00000 3000 00000 000 00000 Adjust Points Point North 2038
266. s Raw File 91 Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C Scad2005 Data Drawing1 ox ute Pts Tools Help Northing Easting Elevation Desc ES 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 START 5100 0000 4900 0000 100 0000 BsPt Azi Set zi 21 0 0000 RodHt 6 000 Fa Prt Code HorzAngle SlopeDist enith ng Desc AR v 133 5330 711 320 828 4057 IPF Disturbed se IP found moved Condition poor Figure 1A Sideshots Off Graphics gt Zoom Mode Within the graphics window real time zoom is available To zoom in press and hold the left mouse button and drag in the direction of the symbol To zoom out press and hold the left button and drag in the direction of the symbol Graphics gt Pan Mode Real time pan is available within the graphics window To pan set the graphics window to pan mode then press and hold the left mouse button and then drag to desired position Graphics gt Resize Text With the this option on the text becomes smaller larger in the view when you zoom in out Graphics Fixed Text Size With this option on the text stays a fixed size while zooming in and out Spreadsheet Colors This option allows for the assignment of colors to record types To change define the color for a particular record select Spreadsheet Colors from the Display pulldown within the raw editor From the Color Settings dialog select the record to edit by clicking on the select button next to the desired record Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw
267. s reporting to bearing mode for any of the Inquiry commands Azimuth Sets reporting to north based azimuth mode for any of the Inquiry commands Gon Sets reporting to gon mode for any of the Inquiry commands Other Allows you to set a custom angle mode by using the Units Control command described later in this chapter 4 Vertical Angle Selects an option to determine how the vertical angle is calculated The Vertical Angle Prompt applies to creating points with commands such as Traverse None The vertical angle will not be used to calculate point elevations 0 Degrees Level The vertical angle is used to calculate elevation and horizontal distance 90 Degrees Level The zenith angle is used to calculate elevation and horizontal distance Elevation Difference Use the elevation difference to calculate the elevation 5 Point Prompt Settings Descriptions Determines whether you are prompted for a point description when creating points and whether the point descriptions are labeled in the point block Elevations Sets prompting and labeling for point elevations Instrument amp Rod Height Turns on prompting for instrument and rod heights when creating points Symbol Name Shows file name of the point symbol you have selected Select Symbol Allows for a graphical selection of the default point symbol Your selection then appears to the right of the button Starting Point Number Allows you to sp
268. s symbols from the symbol library into the drawing The symbol library may be edited using the Edit Symbol Library command The locations of symbols can be specified by selecting points specifying point numbers in the current point database file or by entering the northing and easting e If you specify a point number that already has a symbol on it you will be prompted whether or not to replace the existing symbol e Selecting the Enter coords option allows you to insert the symbol by entering a northing and easting Using the Select Entities option symbols can also be placed on arcs points lines or polylines e Under the Options command you can turn prompting for rotation on or off With rotation off the symbol will be inserted horizontal to the current twist screen Choose a symbol from the Select Symbol dialog shown below by clicking on it Select a different category by choosing the Symbol Category drop down list Within each category use the scroll bar to view all of the symbols Select Symbol Symbol Category Points SP TO SPT Prompts 1 Layer name for symbols lt PNTS gt Press Enter 2 Symbol Size lt 2 0 gt Press Enter 3 Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt pick point 4 Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt 5 10 Inserts symbols at points 5 10 from the current coordinate file Chapter 16 Symbols Commands 258 5 Op
269. screen print to a printer save to file or simply Exit Conclusion Carlson Survey Desktop offers increased automation by permitting use of coordinate files with descriptions to be used for on the fly reactive Field to Finish The process does not use nor require a raw survey data file rw5 or bk This process with some advance detective work on the type of descriptions used can jump start a drawing and save office personnel significant time even when a formal Field to Finish system has not been established You analyze the codes start a new Field to Finish table assign linework and symbols and layers to particular important codes and get the beginnings of a complete drawing Supplement Field to Finish with strategic use of various Polyline Utilities and the designers and drafters can take it from there The 3D breaklines for the perimeter ditch around the landfill saved minutes if not an hour of detailed study and point to point polyline creation leading directly to a quality contour map as shown below Chapter 2 Tutorials 38 Planned Field to Finish Planned Field to Finish Tutorial 1 illustrated a uniquely powerful feature of Carlson Survey Desktop the ability to react quickly to any set of descriptions in a coordinate file and make the best possible drawing from those descriptions This is useful when working with third party coordinate data from contract surveying or when trying to make the best of in house survey work
270. se default standard errors can be overridden for specific measurements by placing SE records directly into the Raw Data File see the above documentation on raw data files Distance Standard Error Precision of distance measurements obtain from EDM specs PPM Parts per Million obtain from EDM specs Horizontal Pointing sec Atmospheric conditions optics experience and care taken by instrument operator Horizontal Reading sec Precision of horizontal angle measurements obtain from theodolite specs Vertical Pointing sec Atmospheric conditions optics experience and care taken by instrument opera tor Vertical Reading sec Precision of vertical angle measurements obtain from theodolite specs Target Centering Location of target prism relative to the point Instrument Centering Location of instrument relative to the point SurvNET 131 Target Height Accuracy of target height Instrument Height Accuracy of instrument height Direction Azimuth Standard Error sec Precision of bearing azimuth records North Coordinate East Coordinate Precision of horizontal coordinate records GPS Standard Errors A GPS Centering Error value and a Vector Std Err Factor value may be entered Differential Leveling Standard Errors Values for Average Distance to BS FS Rod Read Err per 100 ft m and Collimation Err sec may be entered in these three fields Adjustment Network Least Squares Settings Least Squares Adjus
271. sight 1 Foresight 6 Low Angle 190 32 02 High Angle 190 32 10 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 2 Backsight 1 Foresight 3 Low Angle 096 03 48 High Angle 096 03 56 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 3 Backsight 2 Foresight 4 Low Angle 124 03 50 High Angle 124 0356 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 5 Backsight 4 Foresight 10 Low Angle 039 2635 High Angle 039 26 45 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 10 Backsight 5 Foresight 11 Low Angle 241 5623 High Angle 241 5635 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 11 Backsight 10 Foresight 12 Low Angle 114 5620 High Angle 114 56 34 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 12 Backsight 11 Foresight 3 Low Angle 140 39 18 High Angle 140 3931 Difference Warning Angle spread exceeds tolerance Inst at 5 Backsight 4 Foresight 1 Low Angle 117 3035 High Angle 117 30 50 Difference 000 00 07 000 00 08 000 00 08 000 00 06 000 00 10 000 00 12 000 00 14 000 00 13 000 00 15 SurvNET 139 Warning Vertical distance between 1 and 5 exceeds tolerance Low Vert Distance 7 492 High Vert Distance 7 523 Difference 0 031 Warning Horizontal distance between 2 and 3 exceeds tolerance Low Distance 324 154 High Distance 324 195 Differenc
272. site Locate a starting point and an ending or direction point Chapter 12 Layout Commands 224 Area Commands 13 Area Label Defaults Function The Area Defaults dialog box shown below allows you to set the way areas will be labeled rea Defaults Value OrderH Pretix Suffix Value OrderH Perimeter gt J PERIMET Lot Description Sq Fet 7 gt fst a Meters 5q Yards jC Cuerdas 5q Mies Sq Kilometers Actes 2 m Hectares Precision for Square Units Labels 0 0 Precision for Other amp rea Labels 0 00 Precision for Inverse with Area 0 00 Label Both Feet amp Meters for Inverse with rea Label Area with Layer for area text Style for area text Area text size scaler Max gap to join Area by Lines and Ares Different Radius Tolerance Inverse w Areal Use Commas in Labels FEAT AT OMAN 100 0007 0000 AT O00000 Help Pret 1 You must assign a sequence number to each type of label in order to control the order in which the labels are drawn If a sequence number is left blank the corresponding area label value is not used 2 For each value you can set the label suffix name You can also specify the precision of the labels 3 You must determine label style and layer Label Both Feet amp Meters for Inverse with Area When this option is turned ON both feet and meters will be shown in the Inverse with Area report Label Area with Dis
273. son Software web page Upload Field To Finish Codes transfers a code table to Carlson SurvCE When you connect the cable from Carlson SurvCE to the PC a program such as Microsoft ActiveSync may interfere and say Connect to PC Answer No to this prompt If any other program is using the COM port you will not be able to connect properly and CSD may respond with the following message Failed to open COM error code 3 If you receive this error determine what program has control of the COM port and terminate this program Programs to look for include Microsoft ActiveSync PalmPilot synchronization fax programs etc Chapter 3 Data Collectors 62 Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion is also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook Data Collectors 63 CG Field CGField Data Collection O NE O Cres Download Raw Receive CG File Download 45011 Receive CG File Download Coordinates Receive CG File Upload Send Coordinates Convert CG ARAM to Bw Convert AS To Fieldbook Baud 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Point Protect In CSD select Data Collection and choose CGFi
274. sure The difference between the ending point and the reference closing point is the closure error and the sum of the traverse distances from the starting to the ending point is used as the total distance traversed After picking OK for the second dialog the program starts processing the raw file from the top record down The result is displayed in the Standard Report Viewer which can save print or draw the report Angle Balance This process method applies an angle balance to the traverse lines when calculating the coordinates The angle balance takes the angular error divided by the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each traverse line by this amount The angular error is the difference between the angle balance shot and a reference angle The angle balance shot is specified as a type AB or CL AB record in the raw file If no AB record is found in the raw file then the program will prompt for which traverse shot to use as the angle balance shot The angle from the angle balance shot is calculated as the angle from the occupied point to the foresight point The reference angle can be specified as a bearing azimuth or by two point numbers in the dialog shown Edit Process Raw File 107 Reference Closing Angle Measured Closing Points ta 8 Measured Closing Bearing IN 44 58323 vy Measured Closing Azimuth 315 DD 3 7 Angular Error UTI 3 77 From Pt To Pte Reference Closing Angle dd mmess ONE 8 Nw Cancel
275. t Cancel The Show Options on Startup dialog will appear every time the command is run unless this is turned off If it is off then the last settings will apply To get the box back choose O for Options The Elevation of the polyline can be set here The default is 0 If Use Current Drawing Layer is on the layer of the new polyline will be the current layer If the current layer is not used the Layer option allows you to Select from a list or Pick from the screen There are 3 options under Auto Zoom Mode Never will not zoom to the last point picked Proximity will zoom to the percent proximity set below Always will always zoom center on every point If the Proximity Auto Zoom mode is checked the percent of the proximity is set in the Proximity Zoom Level box Prompts Continue Extend Follow Options Pick point or point numbers pick a point Segment length 0 00 Total length 0 00 Arc Direction Close Follow Undo Pick point or point numbers pick a point Segment length 3 83 Total length 3 83 Arc Direction Close Extend Follow Undo Pick point or point numbers pick a point Segment length 2 94 Total length 6 77 press Enter to end Keyboard Command 2DP Prerequisite None 3D Polyline Function Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 240 In addition to the regular AutoCAD Draw 3D Polyline command there 1s the Carlson command that has several options Polyline 3D Options e Show options on startup
276. t G bhensley bhensley DATA UNITSITRAYV r5 CRD file gt c Xscad 7005XDATAMDE avingl cr Store Point gt 100 Line gt 8 Store Point gt 101 Line gt 9 ForeSight Point gt 100 Line gt 113 Foresight Point gt 100 Line gt 115 ForeSight Point gt 101 Line gt 130 ForeSight Point gt 101 Line gt 132 Create Point Notes This option will generate a note NOT file named after the coordinate file The note file contains additional descriptions for points With this option active the text from all note records DS records will be stored to the note file for the foresight point number preceding the note records Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup This option will calculate a scale factor for each TR and SS record This scale factor is calculated as the average of the scale factors at the occupied and foresights points At these points the scale factor is calculated as the state plane grid factor multiplied by the elevation factor which is the earth radius divided by the elevation plus the earth radius SF Grid Factor Earth Radius Elevation Earth Radius In order to calculate these state plane scale factors the traverse coordinates must be in state plane coordinates When this option is selected the program will prompt for the state plane zone to use The Datum to use NAD 27 or 83 must also be selected This selection option becomes available after selection the Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup option
277. t permitting review storage and editing Alternatively field notes can be entered for immediate calculation and screen plotting of points with the raw notes stored simultaneously permitting re processing and re calculation as needed Field to Finish The survey world is recognizing the power of coding field shots with descriptions that lead to automatic layering line work and symbol work Office drafting time can be reduced by 50 or more with intelligent use of Field to Finish plotting For example breaklines which act as barriers to triangulation should be placed on streams ridges toe of slopes and top of banks for more accurate contouring With the Field to Finish command breaklines can be created by field coding with descriptions such as DL for creating 3D polyline ditch lines Without Field to Finish this coordinate data can be simply plotted on the screen as undifferentiated points However with Field to Finish this same data can be plotted in one step creating 3D polyline break lines building lines light poles manholes and edge of pavements which are all distinctly layered and fully annotated CSD s Field to Finish can even adapt to a coding system made up on the fly or one that has been received from an outsourced survey Field crew coding and office processing using Field to Finish can save valuable hours of drafting and eliminate misinterpretations paving the way for quick plat generation and supporting supplemental engi
278. t block symbol or node The decimal place of elevation text is placed at the northing and easting point location Locate within Polyline Inserts only the points that are inside a closed polyline The command prompts you to select a closed polyline All the points in the current coordinate file are checked Any points that are located within the closed polyline are drawn Locate within Distance Inserts only the points that are within a specified distance from a reference point The command prompts you for the reference point and the search distance All the points in the current coordinate file are checked Any points that are located within the search distance of the reference point are drawn Locate within Coordinate Range Inserts only the points that are within the specified range of northing easting and elevation The command prompts you for the minimum and maximum northing easting and ele vations These values default to the actual minimum and maximum in the coordinate file Then the command prompts you for the point number range of points to check The points that fall in both the point number range and the coordinate range are drawn Prompt Label Settings Under Point Prompt Label Settings you determine attributes for which you will be prompted Descriptions Determines whether or not you are prompted for descriptions for each point when creating new points When placing both new and existing points Descriptions determines whethe
279. t calculations Triangulation Prompts you to specify a triangulation surface None No grade elevations are calculated 2 Define Centerline by Defines the type of the centerline to use Chapter 10 Station Offset Commands 210 Polyline Select this option to pick a polyline in the drawing Points Select this option to use points representing the centerline Alignment Select this option to use a horizontal alignment 3 Station Type Assigns the label format 1 00 Stationing is drawn in the format 1 00 14000 Stationing is drawn in the format 1 000 100 Stationing is drawn in the format 100 4 Decimals This is the number of decimals used in the stationing and labeling 5 Type of Curve Sets the type of curve Roadway Stationing uses the actual arc length of the curve Railroad Stationing applies a slight adjustment to the arc length based on 100 foot chord segments Prompts 1 The polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations 2 Select the polyline near the endpoint that defines the first station 3 Select Polyline Centerline select polyline centerline 4 5309 0 4845 0 Station 0 00 5 5526 0 4917 0 Station 228 63 PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 140 4889 13 5410 25 0 00 1 10 00L10 00 Station on Line gt 1 10 00 Offset gt 10 00 Left PtNo North y East x Elev z Description 141 4870 15 5416 55 0 00 1 10 00R10 00 Station on Line gt 1
280. t cutoff lt 0 1 gt 5 2 Select polylines to reduce 3 Select objects pick polylines Prerequisite A polyline Keyboard Command REDUCE Edit Polyline Section Function This command revises a segment of a polyline Begin by picking a point on the polyline where you want to start editing Then pick new points for the polyline When finished picking new points press Enter and then pick a point on the polyline to connect with the new points The polyline segment between the start and end points is then replaced with the new points Prompts Reverse Polyline 251 Select polyline to edit pick the polyline at the place to start editing Pick intermediate point Enter to End pick a point Pick intermediate point U to Undo Enter to End pick a point Pick intermediate point U to Undo Enter to End press Enter Pick reconnection point on polyline pick the polyline at the place to join 7 mun Edit this contour by picking new points Contour with segment replaced with new points Keyboard Command editpl2 Prerequisite Polylines Densify Polyline Vertices Function This command adds vertices to the selected polylines at the specified interval These points are interpolated between existing points in the polyline This command is the opposite of Reduce Polyline Vertices Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 252 Original Palyline After Density Polyline Vertices Prompts 1 Select polylines to
281. t routine Measurement Standard Error Applies to SurvNET the optional Network Least Squares analysis and adjustment routine Process Compute Pts Menu This menu contains tools to process raw data by various methods The calculated coordinates and notes if specified are stored to the active specified coordinate file The coordinate file can be specified using the Set Coordinate file under the Points pulldown within the drawing screen or from the tools menu of the editor discussed later in this section Processing Options are specified on the Process Options Dialog box This dialog box is displayed before processing data using any of the available methods with the exception of the Least Squares method Process Compute Pts No Adjust Angle Balance Compass Crandall Transit Least Squares d Stadia GPS Process Settings Process Options Process Options Multiple Measurements To Same Point Lise Backsight Reciprocals Calculate Elevations All v _ Point Protect Create Point Notes _ Calculate State Plane Scale Factor at Each Setup state Plane Zone Report Each State Plane Scale Scale Factor Correct for Earth Curvature Report Options Report Angle Format Decimal Places for Report 0000 Report Closure e Report SideShots Reference Closing Point Multiple Measurements To Same Point This option sets the method of how to handle multiple measurements to the same point There are three available options
282. t tells the program to check the coordinates of a particular point with the coordinates of another point This code is configurable by the user An example of a point description coded as a Check Point would be as such trav 8 This description tells the program that the description of the point is trav and to check the coordinates of the this point with that of point 8 The Distance Tolerance Horizontal and Vertical are user specified tolerances for the check point If either of these tolerances is exceeded it will be reported on the process results report Process Settings gt Store Point Records These options control how any store point PT record is handled during processing of the raw data file There are three options for storing Store Point PT records Never Always and When CRDEmpty Neverprevents any Store Point PT Record Report in the raw file from being written to the crd file With this option on no existing point in the crd file would be overwritten Always will write to the coordinate file and will overwrite any existing point with the same number of the Store Point PT records The When CRD Empty option will only write Store Point PT records to thecoordinate file when it is empty Report Store Points displays all store points in the process results report The Hold Store Points option will hold the coordinate values for the store point record when measurements are taken to the store points This will prevent the coordinates of the
283. ted for a base point from which the known distance radiates 6 Pick or Type Distance 40 41 A circle is drawn radiating from the selected base point and a line defined by the bearing is extended to intersect the circle 6 int on Pick Intersection point Enter to cancel pick point 7 Pick the correct point for the solution desired and a point symbol is located at the selected intersection The command then erases the temporary circle and line NOTE Except where noted most commands leave the selection of the appropriate object snap mode up to you If a command turns on an object snap the prompt line of a command notates the object snap by enclosing it in brackets 1 e if the midpoint object snap is on mid on appears in the point prompt line Each predefined point symbol has a point entity at the center of the symbol Use the NODE object snap to snap lines or other drawing entities to point symbols 8 Enter Point Number 55 Press Enter This prompt appears only if Automatic Point Numbering is toggled off in the Point Defaults command on the Points menu Bearing Distance Intersect 177 9 Enter Point Symbol Number lt 4 gt Press Enter Symbol number four is located at the computed coordinate and labeled point number 55 This prompt appears only if Prompt for Symbol Numbers is toggled ON in the Point Defaults command on the Points menu Pick correct solution Prerequisite Run Drawing Setup to set defaults Keyboard Com
284. tes in either the NAD 27 or NAD 83 coordinate systems A grid factor is computed for each individual line during the reduction The elevation factor is computed for each individual line if the data is 3D If the raw data has only 2D data the user has the option of defining a project elevation to be used to compute the elevation factor A full statistical report containing the results of the least squares adjustment is produced Coordinates will be written to the current coordinate CRD file Although the NLSA program does not output the standard Error of Closure statement it produces statistical information that allows a much more effective way to evaluate the strength of your traverses and the precision of your measurements See details of this statistical report later in this section Network Least Squares Settings dialog Choosing SurvNET from the pulldown menu displays the Network Least Squares Settings dialog box SurvNET 127 Network Least Squares Settings Coordinate System Input Files Preprocessing Standard Errors Adjustment Output Options scale Factor fi 00000000 Coordinate System Local C State Plane 27 C State Plane 83 Zone Horizontal Units Jus Feet Project Elevation 000 Elevation Units Meters GEOID33 Coordinate System Scale Factor Enter a value Coordinate System Select Local assumed coordinate system SPC 1927 State Plane NAD27 or SPC 1983 State Plane NAD83 Zone If yo
285. the endpoints of the two entities with a polyline Fillet With Radius Zero Performs a tight fillet on the two entities 3 In the Join Nearest Options dialog box choose to join only lines with common elevations or layers Convert lines into polylines Automatically converts any lines in the selection set into polylines Join only identical layers Joins entities on the same layer Join only common elevations Joins entities with identical elevations Original Lines us Original Lines Average Endpoints Together Directly Connect Endpoints Fillet With Zero Radius Prerequisite Lines or Polylines to be joined Keyboard Command NEARJOIN Extend by Distance Function Chapter 15 Polyline Commands 242 This command extends a line or polyline or creates a new line or polyline from an existing one using a specified distance The new segment is drawn from the current position in the direction indicated by the current position arrowhead e Start by selecting an existing line or polyline Initially the current position arrowhead will set itself on the closest vertex where the line or polyline was selected e Extending from the endpoint of a polyline will add a new point to that polyline while extending from any other point will create a new polyline There are two modes of operation draw mode D and move mode M e In draw mode extending will draw line or polyline segments e In move mode the current
286. the raw data file The SurvNET program can also automatically reduce field measurements to State Plane coordinates in either the NAD 83 or NAD 27 coordinate systems A grid factor is computed for each individual line during the reduction The elevation factor is computed for each individual line if the data is 3D If the raw data has only 2D data the user has the option of defining a project elevation to be used to compute the elevation factor A full statistical report containing the results of the least squares adjustment is reported Coordinates will be written to the current point database Although the SurvNET program does not output the standard Error of Closure statement it produces sta tistical information that allows a much more effective way to evaluate the strength of your traverses and the precision of your measurements Raw Data Files The SurvNET program processes Carlson raw data files RW5 Measurement coordinate elevation and direction Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 126 Brg Az records will be recognized Scale factor records are not processed because the software calculates the state plane scale factors automatically Network Least Squares Settings Function The Network Least Squares Adjustment program NLSA performs a mathematically rigorous least squares adjust ment and statistical analysis of a network of raw traverse field data The NLSA program simultaneously adjusts a network of interconnected tr
287. the standard errors by only 5 10 seconds and reprocess the data the final coordinates will not change significantly Network Least Squares 57 Statistics solution converged in 2 iterations Degrees of Preedom 26 Reference varlance 3 159 Standard error unit weight 1 79 Failed the chi square test at the 95 significance level 13 844 lt 82 844 lt 41 923 The next part of the report displays the results of the vertical adjustment The horizontal and the vertical adjust ments are separate least squares adjustment processes As long as there are redundant vertical measurements the vertical component of the network will also be reduced and adjusted using least squares In the vertical adjustment benchmarks are held fixed LEAST SQUARES VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT REPORT Mon Jan 19 09 25 15 2004 Input File c scadxm 2 USER tmp rw5 Output File c scadxml2 USER tmp RPT Curvature refraction correction ON FIXED VERTICAL BENCHMARKS Station Elevation 501 859 9210 503 887 9500 POINTS TO BE ADJUSTED Station 502 504 507 508 505 509 511 516 515 514 513 MEASUREMENT SUMMARY From TO Elev Diff Cunadjusted stderr 501 503 27 9230 0 0147 501 502 13 7517 0 0165 ADJUSTED ELEVATIONS Station Adjusted Elev Standard Dev 501 859 9210 0 00000 503 887 9500 0 00000 502 873 7621 0 03873 ADJUSTED MEASUREMENT SUMMARY From TO Elev Diff Residuals ir ie bo 501 503 28 0290 0 1060 501 502 13 8411 0 0894 Sideshots
288. tions Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt S Enter S for Select entities 6 Entities to Process Choose the types of entities to place symbols on Select arcs points line or polylines 7 Select objects pick a polyline 8 Rotation Angle lt 0 0 gt Press Enter 9 Options Select entities Enter coords lt Point numbers or pick point gt Press Enter Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PTSYM Edit Symbol Library Function This command allows you to customize the symbol library The symbols are sorted alphabetically within each category while categories remain in the placed order This allows the most frequently accessed categories to remain on top Edit Symbol Library E H Paints E Trees n THEET TRHEET D 3 TREES TREE amp DWG TREE TREE DG E North Arrows Add Category Create Symbol Rename Import Symbols Remove Save Up Wa n Add Category Categories are a way to group symbols by type for convenient symbol selection A new category is added by selecting this button An edit field then appears in the tree view on the left and waits for you to enter the category name Press the Enter key to finish the input Rename Select the category or symbol that you want to rename and press this button By default the symbol description is the same as file name Remove Select the category or symbol that you want to remove and press this button
289. tment Options These two options are describe here Maximum Iterations Number of iterations allowed for convergence Select how many places you want to see after the decimal Convergence Threshold Stop when the corrections to the adjustment are less than this value Select how many places you want to see after the decimal Enable sideshots for relative error ellipses Check box for sideshot relative error ellipses Use Initial Backsight As Reference Azimuth Reported directions can be output in Bearing or Azimuth Coordinate Interval Reported coordinates can be output in either North East or East North Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 132 Output Options Network Least Squares Settings sin Standard Errors Adjustment Output Options North East Null Elevation 99999999 0 These settings apply to the output of data to the report and coordinate files If coordinate points already exist in the coordinate file they will be overwritten and updated with the new coordinate values North East Precision Select how many places you want to see after the decimal Elevation Precision Select how many places you want to see after the decimal Distance Precision Select how many places you want to see after the decimal Direction Precision Angular output of nearest second tenth of second or hundredth of second for direc tions Azimuths or Bearings Direction Format Reported directions can be output in Bearing or Az
290. to add to reported dimensions Offset From Line Allows you to set the offset distance from the line to the dimension text Auto Label Closed Pline allows you to choose between automatically labeling the Interior or Exterior or closed polylines You may also choose none Offset Dimension Text allows you to set text specifications for offset dimensions Layer This option allows you to set the layer for the offset text Text Style This option allows you to set the text style for the offset text Text Size Scaler This value multiplied by the horizontal scale determines the actual text size Arrow Size Scaler This option allows you to set the arrow scaler to determine arrowhead size Decimal Places This option allows you to set the precision for the offset dimensions Drop Trailing Zeros This option allows you to truncate trailing zeros from dimensions Label as Feet and Inches This option allows you to use feet and inches Characters To Append This options allows you to set characters to add to reported dimensions Offset From Line This option allows you to set the offset distance from the line to the dimension text Text Alignment allows you to align text either parallel to the line or horizontally in the drawing Chapter 14 Survey Text Commands 234 Position allows you to determine if you are to pick the location of the text or if the text is automatically positioned in the drawing Adjoiner Text allows you to set text specificat
291. to save Print This command outputs the raw data file to the Standard Report Viewer From here you can print the report draw it in the drawing or save it to a file See Standard Report Viewer for more information See example printout Raw File gt c scadxml data survey rw5 Note Survey Example Edit Process Raw File 83 PntNo 1 OcPt 1 InstHgt 5 32 OcPt TR 1 InstHgt 5 43 OcPt TR 2 InstHgt 5 4 OcPt TR 3 TR 4 TR 5 TR 6 InstHgt 5 42 OcPt TR 7 os 7 Import Northing 5000 BsPt RodHgt 6 0 FsPt 2 AR RodHgt 6 0 FsPt 3 AR RodHgt 6 0 ESPE 4 AR 5 AR 6 AR 7 AR RodHgt 6 0 FsPt 8 AR 19 AR Easting Elevation Desc 5000 100 START SetAzi HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng 268 5330 711 420 89 4050 HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng 262 5448 457 760 89 3236 HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng 208 5710 201 310 89 1803 247 1657 497 120 88 5235 277 4835 223 980 90 2926 92 4113 233 880 90 2746 HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng 261 2756 387 250 91 4405 289 3456 112 450 91 3423 Desc P2 Desc P3 Desc P4 P5 P6 P7 Desc CLOSE Sol These routines convert raw data from other formats into the current Carlson RWS5 format The converted raw data will be added to the end of any existing data in the editor In many cases the raw data file to import can be downloaded directly from the data collector or instrument using the Data Collectors command The following supported formats along with their st
292. tor that reduces ground distances to grid After converting the LAT LONG from the GPS records to state plane coordinates and applying the coordinate alignment Localization file the Project Scale Factor is applied as the final adjustment to the coordinates This adjustment is used on the X Y and not the Z The Project Scale Factor is applied by dividing the distance between the coordinate and a base point by the Project Scale Factor The coordinate is then set by starting from the base point and moving in the direction to the coordinate for the adjusted distance The base point is the first point in the alignment Localization file If there are no points specified in the alignment file then 0 0 is used as the base point If using an alignment file Localization File this value will be automatically calculated and displayed Manual entry of a scale factor is also permitted and is often used with the Two Point Alignment Method when a scale factor is known GPS gt Geoid to Apply The supported geoids include Geoid99 USA Geoid03 USA EGM96 World GDA94 Australia CGG2000 HT 2 0 HT HT 1 01 Canada and SGMO2 Britain This option will account for the geoid undulation in determining the orthometric elevation of the measurement The definition of the geoid model as currently adopted by the national Geodetic survey is the equipotential surface of the Earth s gravity field which best fits in a least squares sense global mean sea level Orthometr
293. traverse has not been closed then turn this toggle off for quick processing Report Sideshots Controls whether the sideshot data is shown on the process report Reference Closing Point This is an optional field for entering the coordinates to compare the ending traverse point with This reference closing point is used to calculate the closure Without using this option the program will by default use the starting coordinate as the reference closing point The Tabular Report Viewer displays a report viewer consisting of tabs Each tab organizes and displays different data depending upon the process option chosen The process results using the No Adjust method results in three tabs the Report Header Unadjusted Data and the Store Points tabs Each of these tabs display different information which corresponds to the tab title Using an adjustment method results in five tabs In addition to the three listed above an Angle Balance and Compass Closure tab is added From the Tabular Report Viewer the Standard Report Viewer can be switched to by pressing the Report option at the bottom of the dialog This is useful when wanting to combine all tabs into one report for printing or saving to a file An example of a Tabular Report for a compass rule adjustment is shown below Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 106 Process Compass Results Report Header Unadjusted Data Store Points Angle Balance Compass Closure
294. u choose SPC 1927 or SPC 1983 you can select the State and Zone you are in The grid scale factor is computed for each measured line using the method described in section 4 2 of NPAA Manual NOS NGS 5 State Plane Coordinate System of 1983 by James E Stem Horizontal Units Applies to the input output of coordinate values Meters US Feet or International Feet Compute Elevation Factor From When you select SPC 1927 or SPC 1983 in order to calculate the com bined scale factor so as to adjust distances to sea level you will be given the choice of either entering a Project Elevation or using the elevations of the calculated coordinate points Raw Data If you are reducing a 2D network select Project Elevation since none of the calculated points will have elevations For most survey projects it is sufficient to use an approximate elevation such as can be obtained from a Quad Sheet For 3D networks the elevation factor is computed for each individual line Geoid Modeling You can choose either Use Project Geoid Separation or Use Geoid File Geoid Separation This feature is dependent upon which Geoid Modeling option you decide to use Coordinate System Adjustment Model Pick between 2D 1D Model or 3D Model Apply Horizontal Adjustment Check box for adjustment of North East values Apply Vertical Adjustment Check box for adjustment of elevations You can adjust either horizontal and vertical data horizontal data only or vertical data only
295. ud rate are set correctly 7 Select the CSD Upload button A dialog now allows you to specify the range of point numbers to upload 8 Enter the range of points and click the Start Transfer button Convert RW5 to Fieldbook The Fieldbook conversion converts a Carlson raw file RW5 into a Autodesk Land Desktop raw file FBK The purpose of the Fieldbook conversion is for processing the raw data through the Autodesk Land Desktop Fieldbook instead of the CSD Edit Process Raw file command The Fieldbook conversion 1s also located in the Edit Process Raw Data command under File gt Export gt Fieldbook SMI Downloading 1 To send point data from the SMI data collector go to the File Transfer command by typing More NXT TOPC COMM 2 In SMI version 6 or later type Job KERM SEND Also in version 6 make sure that the first function key reads NE and not XY in the Job KERM screen Otherwise the coordinate northing and easting will be reversed The NE stands for North East coordinate order which is the format that CSD expects Also in the Job KERM screen make sure that the second function key reads COMM and not SPACE The COMM stands for comma separators 3 Enter the first point to send followed by the last point to send 4 Before pressing Enter for the last point stop here and go to CSD 5 Run Data Collection and choose SMI Check that the COM port and baud rate are set correctly 6 Select the Download butto
296. ulated For example if the tra verse point elevations have already been adjusted and you need to recalculate the sideshot elevations then use the SideShots Only option Report SideShots Specify whether to include the sideshot data in the process results report Point Protect This option will check the point database for existing point data before processing If the foresight point number for any traverse or sideshot record already is a stored coordinate in the point database then the program shows a list of conflicting point numbers You can either continue processing and overwrite the point database coordinates with the calculated raw file coordinates or cancel the processing to go back to the editor to change foresight numbers Point Protect Duplicate Point Numbers Store Point 1 8B Line 8 Store Point 101 Line 9 ForeSight Point 188 Line 113 ForeSight Point 188 Line 115 ForeSight Point 181 Line 138 ForeSight Point 161 Line 132 File 5 Return to Editor A report of the conflicting point numbers can be generated to the standard report viewer by selecting the Report option on the Point Protect dialog box From the report viewer the report can then be printed sent to the screen or saved to a file Edit Process Raw File 99 SurvCADD Edit c scad2005 USER scadrprt tmp File Edit Settings a qx gt Eed Fa Open Save Print Exit Fid Screen Hide Duplicate points in RW5 and CRD File 2 3 2005 19 05 Raw file g
297. ups are another way of defining a range of points to plot Point Groups can be defined using the Point Group Manager under the Points pulldown menu and include points sharing certain descriptions elevation ranges locations on the screen etc Locate Points on Real Z Axis Choose between locating all the points at real Z elevation all at zero elevation or to use the real Z setting as defined in the individual codes Locate Linework on Real Z Axis Choose between locating all the linework at real Z elevation all at zero elevation or to use the real Z setting as defined in the individual codes PC PT Curve Type Sets the method for drawing curves with more than 3 points The Bezier option draws a smooth polyline through all the curve points The Tangent Arcs method draws multiple arcs with arc end points at each of the curve points These arcs are tangent to the preceding line segment Erase Existing Field to Finish Linework When checked this option will erase from the drawing any old linework entities created by previous Field To Finish runs before drawing the new entities Layer Prefix Optional layer prefix added to all entities drawn with Field to Finish Pause on Undefined Codes When checked Field to Finish will pause if it encounters a description that is not defined in the code table and show the dialog box below A good way to check the data file for unmatched descriptions is to use the Print Table command and choose the Data Points and
298. ur multiple selection You can only do things that apply to multiple codes at once To change the layer for both select Main Layer then enter TopOfBank as shown here Field to Finish ES DATA C SLand projects 2004 LandhlEogosPomtsmdb CODE C sktop 2004 Survepdesktop D atas andrill Hd CODE FULL HAHE DESC S YHBOL LIHETVPE ENTITY TIE LAYER OH OFF BYLAYER Line DEFAULT On EYLAYER Point On BYLAYER 3bP1line On EYLAYER Point On BYLAYER Line On EYLAYER 3bP1line On BYLAYER BYLAYER 1 a nce IS dashed 2DPline Open Multiple Set Multiple Set Layer Nare Copy Paste Repeat the process for Entity and set it to a 3D Polyline Any survey point can be part of a line or polyline as well as having a defined symbol Defining Symbol Coding Codes FP LP and TP represent points that benefit from layering and special symbols to assist in drafting and design Although reactive Field to Finish makes sense for linework some codes may be distinguishable as specific points e g LP as Light Pole FP as Fence Pole and TP as Traverse Point Click LP in the list above and select Edit Place LP in layer Utility and choose Set Symbol and choose a symbol icon such as SPT20 scroll down to locate this symbol after selecting Set Symbol Chapter 2 Tutorials 28 Edit Field Code Definition Category Processing ON Sequence Cade Additional 2D Polpline Layer Description Use Raw Description Set Linetupe E Symbol
299. urve direction Left lt Right gt Press Enter for right 10 Non tangent Reverse tangent Bearing Chord Delta angle Tangent Arc length N In this example the curve is a non tangent curve so enter N If the curve is tangent to the previous leg then enter the arc length Enter C for a chord length D to enter the delta angle or T to enter the tangent distance 11 Chord Bearing Qdd mmss 245 2341 12 Length of Chord 201 22 13 Undo Exit Curve Bearing Qdd mmss gt 345 3218 14 Varas Poles Chains Distance 209 28 15 Undo Exit Curve Bearing Qdd mmss gt 445 2348 16 Varas Poles Chains Distance 200 54 17 Undo Exit Curve Bearing Qdd mmss gt E Enter E to end the prompting and calculate the closure error Closure error distance 1 35251089 Error Bearing N 70d41 35 E oo a Dna BW LW Closure Precision gt 1 in 607 63 Total Distance Traversed gt 821 82 Prerequisite None Keyboard Command PDD Enter Deed Description 193 Process Deed File Function The Process Deed File command contains several functions for deed files PDD e A deed file consists of one or more deed descriptions Each deed description includes a deed name starting coordinate and line and curve data C Program Files Carlson Software zz data sesample pdd Deed Name Precision for report 0 00 Edit Add Remove Report Draw Save Save As Exit Help e Generate a Deed Report Highli
300. vation 107 500 Total Error 0 060 Error Per Turn 0 010 Humber of Turns 6 SR EMX 5 300 TP 0 700 TP 15 000 TP A 6 500 TE 2 300 TP 16 300 ER BMY 6 500 105 300 100 000 114 000 111 5900 109 100 119 200 100 000 99 300 99 000 105 100 106 800 102 500 107 440 100 000 99 310 99 020 105 130 106 840 102 550 107 500 Measured Closing Elevation 99 950 Reference Closing Elevation 100 000 Stal roar D 5 Level File Report example Keyboard Command diglevel Prerequisite LEV level file to process Edit Process Level Data 189 Chapter 8 Edit Process Level Data 190 Deed Commands Enter Deed Description Function The Enter Deed Description command lets you enter line and curve data which is drawn and optionally annotated as entered At the end the closure and area of the figure is reported The command starts with the dialog box shown here Enter Deed Description B X Line and Curve Layer DEED Annotations Layer BRRTAZT Paints Layer PNTS Traverse by Bearing C Azimuth C Bon Points Point Format f Complete Points Descriptions Only f Mone v Draw Linewark v Join Lines A amp rcs Into Polpline Prompt For Descriptions fw Prompt For Elevations i Plot Point Symbols Create Radius Points Store to Raw Data File A S Store ta Deed File Deed Name LOT1 File name Hle Land Projects 35 T utanalsssurveu sqq pad Specii Deed Eile Hame Deed
301. ve the transfer using the arrow buttons and then press the Run button Converting CSD supports raw and coordinate data collected using three different Leica Operation Codes Wildsoft 10 20 30 40 and the newer LISCAD Data can also be in the GSI8 format or the newer GSI16 format Leica raw files usually have a RAW or GST extension The primary difference between the GSI8 and GSI16 formats is that in the GSI16 format information 1s contained in data blocks of 16 characters while it is contained in blocks of 8 characters in the GSI8 format Leica instruments make it possible to have both the GSI8 as well as GSI16 data formats in the same raw file Lines with the GSI16 format data always start with an asterisk sign to distinguish them from the GSI8 format There is no distinction between Leica raw files collected in the Wildsoft and LISCAD Operation codes 1 The Convert Leica button can be used to convert any Leica format file into a CSD format file e g 1f you have a Leica PCMCIA card no serial cable transfer is needed Instead use the Convert command to make the RW5 and coordinate files Since there is no distinction between Wildsoft and LISCAD files you must know in advance which format has been used in the file 2 Select that particular option Wildsoft 10 20 30 40 or LISCAD under the Coding System option at the bottom of the dialog box You must choose the order in which foresight backsight readings were recorded in the raw
302. vity 1s expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation e This software is licensed as a single product Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer e Under certain circumstances you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA provided that the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA e Without prejudice to any other rights Carlson Software may terminate this EULA 1f you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In this event you are required to destroy all copies of this software and all of 1ts component parts COPYRIGHT e All title and copyrights in and to this software including but not limited to any images photographs an imations video audio music text or applets incorporated into this software the accompanying printed materials and any copies of this software are the sole property of Carlson Software and or its suppliers This software is protected by United States copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as applicable intellectual property laws and treaties Treat this software as you would any other copyrighted material U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS e Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government of this software or its documentation is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph cX1 1 of the Right in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAARS 252 227 7013 o
303. w hidden rows the row above the first hidden row and the row below the last hidden row must be selected by using the shift key selection method described in Hide Chapter 4 Edit Process Raw File 94 Row above After selecting the appropriate rows select the Show Row option Figure 2B shows the selection of rows 9 amp 18 in order to show the hidden rows 10 17 Figure 2C shows the editor after the Show Row option has been selected Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C Scad2005 Data Drawing1 crd _ EX Edit Display Add Process Compute Pts Tools Help Espe code HorzAngle SlopeDist 4 Northing Easting Elevation Desc 5000 0000 5000 0000 100 0000 START 5100 0000 4900 0000 100 0000 Bs Pt Azi Sset zi 21 RodHt 6 000 Code HorzAngle SlopeDist Code HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng AR 208 5658 201 303 89 1805 Ex 299 989 88 5432 Elevation 120 0000 Figure 2B Raw Editor RW5 gt C Ashow Survey1 rw5 CRD gt C IScad2005DataWDrawing1 crd X File Edit Display Add Process Compute Pts Tools Help E EA AO E O ES ELITES IE PRESSE OcPt BsPt Azi SetAzi 1 21 0 0000 InstHt RodHt 5 320 6 000 OcEr F3Pt Code HorzAngle SlopeDist 1 2 AR FERREE 711 320 89 405 Lu tn En H Jefe 4 4 4 4 4 4 H La EH La L InstHt 5 400 OcEr Code HorzAngle SlopeDist ZenithAng Desc Lo oo En a e wn wn wn r le S S S Pu Ex Figure 2C Hide Des
304. will be another line Both CODEI and CODE2 use the definition for CODE e g the code EP could be a code for edge of pavement that is to be connected as 3D polylines If there are two separate edge of pavement lines on the left and right sides of a road all the points for the left side could have the description EP1 and the points on the right side could be EP2 The second method is the PointCAD format This method also connects points with the same code The difference 1s that instead of using a number after the code for distinct lines you use the same code with an additional code for starting and ending the line e g 0 is used to start a line and 0 to end So the coding for a segment of edge of pavement could be EP 0 EP EP EP 0 Another special code that has been added to Field to Finish is 7 7 This 7 code will use the line type definition of line 2D polyline or 3D polyline defined by the Field to Finish code e g if EP is defined as a 3D polyline then the coding EP 7 EP EP EP 7 will create a 3D polyline Otherwise codes like 0 0 which is defined as start and end line will draw EP as a line e The advantage of the PointCAD method is that you do not have to keep track of line numbers If you are surveying 50 curb lines the first method would require you to use 50 distinct curb numbers e The advantage to the first method is that you do not have to use the start and end codes Additionally the Nearest Found connection option
305. will be displayed Select the desired system and press OK GPS gt Zone for State Plane projections you must select the correct state zone that you are working in For UTM the Automatic Zone option will have the program automatically user the program automatically use the correct UTM zone for your location Otherwise for UTM you can manually set a specific UTM zone This manual option applies to working on the border between zones and you want to force the program to always use one of those zones GPS gt Use Alignment File For Localization With this option toggle on a prompt for the Alignment File to Process will be displayed This file is typically created by SurvCE Carlson s Data Collection System using the Localization routine or by Carlson Field Using the Align to Local Coordinates routine This file DAT contains the parameters to transform the derived State Plane coordinates to the defined local coordinates Alignment File to Process dat Existing Recent Folders C Scad2005 Data File Name KYdat File Size Date Modified Data Preview Recently used files File name Folder At the end of the process the coordinates will be written to the current point database file and a report will be presented in the Carlson editor for saving or printing purposes GPS gt Transformation The transformation in the align Local Coordinates command can either be by plane simi larity or rig
306. xt file The text file format is comma delimited with point number station offset and elevation The station should be just the station number without the 1 e 250 instead of 2 50 The elevation is optional The Read File option is a quick routine to convert a station offset data file into coordinates When Offset Prompt is set to Both Left Right the program will prompt for left and right offsets If you respond Chapter 10 Station Offset Commands 208 to an offset prompt with zero 0 no offset point is created The Single Offset option will prompt for one offset per station Enter a right offset with a positive value and a left offset as a negative value Use Station Type to specify the stationing format to use Use Type of Curve to specify whether the curves are for a roadway or railroad Prompts Offset Point Settings Dialog Polyline should have been drawn in direction of increasing stations Select Polyline near endpoint which defines first station nea on Select Polyline to Station Measure select a polyline 5309 0 4845 0 Station 0 00 5526 0 4917 0 Station 228 63 Distance from beginning station along centerline Enter to end 0 Starting Segment Station 0 0 Ending Segment Station 228 633 Working Line segment 5413 4 4879 64 0 0 Left offset distance lt 10 0 gt 75 Right offset distance lt 15 0 gt 20 Distance from beginning station along centerline Enter to end press Enter Keyboard Command offpt
307. y pulldown menu This is the normal order of business download the data collector process the raw data and recalculate coordinates then conduct Field to Finish Only for the most basic type of radial survey GPS survey or pure stakeout project should raw data processing be bypassed CSD s raw editor has options for color coding record types notes foresights instrument heights etc hiding and restoring record types for more condensed viewing of key data and displaying the survey graphically during the editing process so the impact of changes can be seen see below Planned Field to Finish 41 Raw Editor RW5 I Seminar files site2 nw5 CRD gt C Land Projects 2004 Landfill cogo points mdb alex ocPt BsPt REO ON OcPt FsPt Code Horz ngle Slopebist Zenith ng Desc E 71 AR y 135 1119 55 000 88 4511 HS obi EN o FsPt Code Horz ngle SlopeDist zenith ng Desc ET 72 AR y 195 2516 60 000 92 3509 HS END BEEBE Note ME Oc OP72 N 5060 00000 E 5000 00000 EL95 75000 H3 7 7 OcPt BaPt Azi Ssetizi ae EE 0 0000 OcPt FsPt Code Horz ngle SlopeDistr enithing EE 73 AR v 213 1922 75 000 31 5139 Note the description coding The description HS has been appended with OHI OH is a reserved expression for offset horizontal In Field to Finish the polyline defined by HS will be drawn and a second polyline would also be drawn at unit offset to the right in the direction of the polyline This might plot for instance the face of a wa
308. you will input or is contained in the rw5 file The Vertical Angle selection assumes the barrel or scope of the instrument is level when reading 0 zero With this setting the vertical component of a measurement record will have a header of VertAng The Zenith Angle selection most commonly used assumes the barrel scope to be level when reading 90 Using this setting results in a header of ZenithAng Elevation difference displays the elevation difference between the occupied and foresight points If the Distance option is specified as Slope this elevation difference will be used to calculate the horizontal distance of the measurement The header for this record 1s ElevDiff The None selection assumes all distances are horizontal distances and removes the vertical component for a measurement from the editor Switching modes can be performed at any time Vertical Angle X4 Zenith Angle Elevation Difference None Distance This option controls the display of either Slope or Horizontal Distances Changing the display results in the distance data adjusting to reflect the correct value for the selection made The Vertical data VertAng ZenithAng Edit Process Raw File 89 or VertDiff is used to convert the distance value when changing this display option E CREE fy soe Horizontal Graphics The Raw Data Editor uses an optional graphics window to display the points and traverse lines in real time As data 1s

4 - Carlson Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents